Mini Sessions Made Easy

113. Why Social Media Isn't Enough To Book Out Your Minis

Rebecca Rice — Thu, 27 Mar 2025 07:00:00 -0500

More Resources: Free Minis Marketing Class| FB Ad Mini Course

If you’ve ever felt frustrated posting your mini sessions over and over on social media and still not seeing bookings come through—you're not alone. This is one of the biggest pain points I see photographers face. Social media feels like it should be enough, right? You’re doing all the things—posting daily, showing up in stories, maybe even creating reels. But somehow, your calendar still has open spots. The truth is, while social media can be a powerful tool, it is not a complete marketing strategy. Find out Why social media isn't enough to book out your Minis!

Here's What We'll Cover:

Why Social Media Isn't Enough (1:49)

A Multi-Touch Strategy (5:00)

Beyond Social Media (7:05)

Resources Made for You (11:03)

Why Social Media Isn’t Enough to Book Out Your Minis

Let’s start with a harsh truth: you don’t own your Instagram or Facebook account. At any moment, the algorithm can shift—or worse, the platform can go down entirely—and your audience reach disappears with it. Even when things are working, only about 4% of your followers are actually seeing what you post. So if you have 1,000 followers, that’s only around 40–50 people seeing your content. And if your conversion rate is around 1–3% (which is normal), that’s barely enough interest to book even a single session. Relying solely on social media means you’re speaking to the same small circle over and over. To book out your minis, you need to get in front of new people... not just the followers who already know you.

You Need a Multi-Touch Marketing Strategy

Marketing isn’t about showing up in one place and hoping for the best. It’s about creating multiple touch points that guide someone from “interested” to “ready to book.” Experts say it takes at least 7 interactions before someone takes action, which means your audience needs to see your mini sessions a lot. Instead of focusing only on Instagram or Facebook, build a complete marketing plan that includes social media and email marketing, local outreach, SEO, and even paid ads. That way, you’re increasing visibility, staying top-of-mind, and creating urgency through repetition.

Go Beyond Social Media to Fill Your Calendar

If you’re ready to get serious about your marketing, it’s time to go beyond your social feed. Start by posting in local Facebook groups to reach moms in your area who aren’t following you yet. Next, partner with local businesses (think boutiques, preschools, coffee shops, or pediatrician offices) for cross-promotions that benefit both of you. Make sure your SEO is on point, so that when someone Googles “family photographer in [your city],” your site actually shows up. And if you’re up for it, try running Facebook and Instagram ads to target new families in your area. These tools, used together, help you reach way more people than social media alone ever could.

If you're tired of posting and praying your minis will fill, it’s time to shift to a real strategy. Start small... pick one new method to implement this week and build from there. Want a deeper dive into marketing that works? Check out my free Minis Marketing Class. You don’t have to guess your way through this anymore, I’m here to help!

112. The Power of Using an Email List To Book Out Mini-Sessions

Rebecca Rice — Thu, 20 Mar 2025 07:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts |Spotify |Transcript

More Resources: Email Freebie| Flodesk Discount

Email marketing is one of the most powerful tools for booking out your mini sessions, yet many photographers overlook it. If you’ve ever struggled to fill your spots, relying only on social media, it’s time to rethink your approach. Unlike social platforms, where algorithms limit your reach, emails land directly in your audience’s inbox. I hear from students all the time who are shocked at how effective email marketing is—they send a couple of emails and book out almost instantly! Today, I’ll talk through how to use an email list to book out your Mini Sessions. Plus, why it's important for you to get started now!

Here's What We'll Cover:

My Favorite Email Marketing Platform (2:49)

Why Start with Your Email List (4:03)

What to Send to Your Email List (7:43)

How to Grow Your Email List (10:57)

Why Use an Email List to Book Out Your Mini Sessions

Your email list is filled with your warmest leads (people who already know, like, and trust you). This makes email marketing the fastest and easiest way to turn potential clients into booked clients. While Instagram stories might only be seen by 4% of your followers, emails reach your entire list every single time. Plus, with the right strategy, you can create a personal connection with your audience, keeping them engaged and eager to book when your minis go live.

What to Send to Your Email List

If you’re wondering what to send, start with a four-email sequence for your Mini Session launch. First, a teaser email to build anticipation, second a "Now Booking" email giving your list first access, third an update email sharing how spots are filling up, and finally, a "Last Call" email to create urgency before opening to the public. Many photographers hesitate to send multiple emails, fearing they’ll annoy their audience, but the truth is—people are busy! A single email can be missed, and follow-ups ensure more eyes on your offer.

How to Grow Your Email List

If you're not sure how to grow your email list, start with past clients! Invite them to join your VIP email list for exclusive early access to sessions. Use social media to collect emails with a freebie, like a Mini Session prep guide, or run a giveaway where entry requires signing up. The key is to take action today! Start building your list and commit to growing it. Your email list has the potential to transform your business, making Mini Session bookings easier and more profitable than ever!

Some actions steps I want you to take include starting your list today! Grab my Email Freebie and get started. I'll walk you through how to get going. Second, check out this Flodesk link and enjoy a discount on my favorite email marketing platform! Flodesk makes it easy for you to plug in your brand and utilize stunning templates. You can do this!

111. Using Minis To Get Full Session Clients

Rebecca Rice — Thu, 13 Mar 2025 07:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts |Spotify |Transcript

More Resources: 12 Theme Ideas Freebie | Flodesk Discount

Mini sessions are an incredible way to attract new clients, but many photographers wonder how to convert those Mini Clients into Full Session bookings. While Mini Sessions are highly profitable (especially during peak seasons like fall and spring) not every type of session can or should be a mini. When big life events happen, like welcoming a new baby or celebrating a first birthday, clients are much more likely to book a full session. The key is to strategically leverage your mini sessions to encourage those Full-Session bookings. So, let's dive into how you can use Minis to get Full Session clients!

Here's What We'll Cover:

3 Must-Be Full Sessions (3:22)

How to Leverage Your Minis (8:29)

Key Marketing Strategies for Full Sessions (11:45)

Recap (14:36)

Not Every Session Should Be a Mini

Educating your clients on the difference between mini and full sessions is crucial. Some sessions require more time, flexibility, and a personalized experience—meaning they simply can’t be squeezed into a 10-15 minute slot. Three session types that don’t work as minis include: Smash Cake Sessions, Lifestyle Newborn Sessions, and Extended Family Sessions. By educating your clients upfront, you naturally create opportunities to upsell them into full sessions when these milestones occur.

Turning Minis Clients into Full Session Clients

Mini sessions serve as the perfect entry point for clients to get to know you, experience your style, and fall in love with your work. When you deliver a top-notch mini session experience, booking a full session later becomes an easy decision. A great strategy is to plant the seed early. During a mini session, mention full-session options if you learn a client is expecting or has a milestone coming up. Follow up with past clients at key times, like when a newborn turns 10 months old! Remind them about first birthday sessions and other milestones. Offer incentives, like early access to Full-Session dates or priority booking for loyal Mini Session clients.

Marketing Strategies to Encourage Full Session Bookings

To consistently book more full sessions, be intentional with your marketing. Showcase Full Sessions by posting images from full sessions on social media so clients see what you offer. Educate on the Differences. Use blog posts, Instagram captions, and emails to highlight the benefits of full sessions. Leverage real client stories! Share before-and-after journeys of Mini Session clients who later booked Full Sessions.

The goal isn’t to replace Mini Session bookings with Full Sessions. Both serve different purposes. Instead, it’s about maximizing revenue by making sure Mini Session clients know about and book Full Sessions for their big life moments. When done right, this strategy can be a game-changer for your photography business!

110. Why Your Minis Aren't Booking

Rebecca Rice — Thu, 06 Mar 2025 07:30:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts |Spotify |Transcript

More Resources: 12 Theme Ideas Freebie | Flodesk Discount

Have you ever wondered why your Minis aren't booking? If you've struggled with booking out your sessions or they aren't booking the way you expected them to then you're in the right place! Trust me, we've all been there. The good news? Mini Sessions work, and with a few strategic tweaks, you can turn things around. In this episode, we’re diving into the three biggest reasons your minis aren’t booking: your timing or theme isn’t resonating, your marketing strategy is incomplete, or your messaging isn’t connecting with your ideal clients. Stick with me, and let’s troubleshoot your Minis so you can start booking out with confidence!

Here's What We'll Cover:

Theme or timing holding you back? (2:14)

Social strategy (7:01)

Is your messaging connecting with clients? (12:03)

Recap as a whole (14:27)

Is Your Mini Session Theme or Timing Holding You Back?

One of the biggest reasons Mini Sessions don’t book is that the theme or timing isn’t resonating with your ideal clients. Just because a theme was popular last year doesn’t mean it will work again this year! Trends shift and client preferences change. Some themes become overdone, while others may not be in demand at all. Additionally, the dates you choose can make or break your success. If your minis fall too close to holidays, school breaks, or major local events... families might already have plans. So, do your research! Look at current trends, ask past clients what themes they’re excited about, and test new ideas that fit what families want right now. When you align your Minis with what your audience is actually looking for, you’ll see more interest and faster bookings.

Are You Relying on One Post to Fill Your Mini Sessions?

Posting once and hoping for bookings isn’t enough! Only 4% of your followers see what you post, so you need to reach beyond your audience to get more bookings. A strong marketing strategy includes consistent social media posts, reels, and stories, plus email marketing to remind past clients. Local outreach, like sharing in Facebook groups or partnering with businesses, also helps spread the word. Creating urgency with limited spots or early bird discounts can drive faster bookings. Instead of relying on one post, map out a marketing plan across multiple touch points over several weeks for the best results!

Is Your Messaging Connecting With the Right Clients?

If your mini-sessions aren’t booking, your messaging may not be resonating. Clients don’t just want a “Mini-Session”... they want an easy, stress-free way to capture beautiful family photos! Focus on the emotional appeal rather than just the photography itself. You should clearly communicate when, where, how much, and what’s included to eliminate any confusion. Instead of simply listing details, highlight why they need it. This small shift can connect you to your ideal client!

Start by evaluating your theme and timing—would you be excited to book this session yourself? Next, create a solid marketing plan that includes multiple social media posts, emails to past clients, and engagement in local groups to reach beyond your current audience. Finally, refine your messaging to focus on what your clients truly want, not just what you’re offering. When you align these key elements, you’ll see more interest and start filling those spots faster.

109. Spring Minis Theme Ideas

Rebecca Rice — Thu, 13 Feb 2025 07:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts |Spotify |Transcript

More Resources: Prep Week | 12 Theme Ideas Freebie

Spring is right around the corner, which means it's the perfect time to start planning your Spring Minis! With warmer weather, blooming flowers, and families eager to capture seasonal memories, spring is one of the best times to book out your minis. Today, I’m sharing creative Spring Mini Session ideas that will make your Minis stand out, attract more clients, and boost your bookings. Whether you’re looking for fresh ideas or want to refine your approach, this episode will lend inspiration to help you plan successful and profitable Spring Minis! Before diving in make sure you sign up for my newest FREE resource... PREP WEEK! This 4 day training paired with today's episode is a guaranteed win for Spring.

Here's What We'll Cover:

Why Spring? (5:45)

Theme Ideas (7:52)

Questions to Ask While Planning (11:25)

Prep Week (15:03)

Spring Mini Session Ideas

A well-thought-out Spring Mini Session idea can be the key to booking out your spots quickly! A strong theme creates excitement making it easier for potential clients to envision themselves in the session. It also helps you stand out from other photographers running minis in your area, giving you a unique edge in the market. The best spring themes are fresh, colorful, and family-friendly! By incorporating elements that feel light and full of life you'll end up attracting more clients. And while being unique is important just make sure it appeals to a wide range of clients! Some go to Spring Mini session ideas would include seasonal flowers (think blue bonnets or cherry blossoms), vintage Spring picnic, Easter Minis or a flower market location!

Spring Mini Marketing Must

Preparing for your Spring Minis starts with capturing promo shots that will attract clients and fill your calendar. The best way to do this? Set up your Mini Session backdrop in advance and use a real family for test shots. This helps potential clients visualize what their photos will look like and creates instant marketing content. If you're doing a wildflower field theme, you can use a stock image of wildflowers for early promotion and then update your marketing with an actual portfolio image once you've photographed a session. The key is to help future clients envision themselves in your promo!

If you’re feeling unsure about how to market your minis effectively, Prep Week starts next week! It’s a FREE, four-day challenge where we’ll cover marketing strategies, pricing, workflows, and everything you need to book out your minis with confidence. Don’t miss this opportunity to make your Mini Sessions more profitable and stress-free, sign up today!

108. How To Price Your Full Sessions So Your Minis Pricing Makes Sense

Rebecca Rice — Thu, 06 Feb 2025 07:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts |Spotify |Transcript

More Resources: Episode 107| Prep Week

Pricing your full sessions correctly is key to making sure your mini-session pricing makes sense and stays profitable. In this episode of Minis Made Easy, I’m breaking down how full sessions set the foundation for your pricing strategy, common mistakes photographers make, and the steps to ensure your full session pricing supports (not competes with) your minis. If you’ve ever struggled to balance these two session types, this episode is for you! Before diving in you need to how to price your Mini Sessions. This is only possible by doing a CODB which I walked us through in last week's episode! Give THIS podcast a listen then you'll be ready to jump into how to price your photography sessions so they make sense.

Here's What We'll Cover:

Define a Full Session Vs. Mini Session (2:52)

Pricing Mistakes (5:42)

Sessions that are NOT Minis (10:29)

Key Take Aways (15:01)

Why Full Sessions Set the Foundation for Your Photography Pricing Strategy

Full sessions play a crucial role in your photography business. They offer clients a full-service experience while establishing the foundation for your pricing structure. As the premium option, full sessions set the perceived value of your work and help differentiate your services from mini-sessions. Mini-sessions should be a lower investment, but they must still reflect your expertise and not undercut the value of full sessions. A common mistake photographers make is pricing minis correctly but then realizing their full session pricing no longer makes sense! Often this requires an adjustment to maintain profitability. By positioning full sessions as the high-end choice and aligning your pricing strategy effectively, you can create a sustainable and profitable photography business while ensuring that both session types attract the right clients.

How to Price Photography Sessions for Profitability and Alignment

Setting the right price for your full sessions starts with understanding your target client... their budget, what they value, and how to position full sessions as a premium experience. Next, calculate your costs and desired profit by factoring in session time, editing, and business expenses to ensure your pricing reflects your expertise and brand. A good rule of thumb is to set your full session price at least double your mini-session price to maintain a balanced structure. For example, if your full sessions are $500, your minis should be in the $200–$250 range.

Finally, communicate the value of full sessions by emphasizing their benefits—longer session time, more variety in locations, all-digitals included, and a fully personalized experience. Educating your clients on the differences between full and mini sessions is essential because not all sessions can be a mini. Certain session types, like newborn and cake smash photography, require a full session to provide the best client experience. By aligning your pricing structure strategically, you ensure both session types complement each other while maximizing your profitability.

107. How To Price Your Minis

Rebecca Rice — Thu, 30 Jan 2025 07:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts |Spotify |Transcript

More Resources: Mini Session Theme Ideas | Prep Week

Pricing your mini sessions can feel like a guessing game. Should you charge what other photographers do? Should you price lower to attract more bookings? Or maybe you feel like you're just throwing out a number and hoping it works. If you’ve ever second-guessed your pricing, you’re not alone! Many photographers struggle with setting prices that not only attract clients but also ensure profitability. Today we'll be calculating your cost of doing business (CODB) because pulling numbers from thin air or copying what other photographers are doing won't help YOU and your business succeed! Let's learn how to price your mini sessions for profit!

Here's What We'll Cover:

Why Calculate Your CODB (3:40)

Gathering Your Numbers (7:02)

Calculating Your Numbers (10:34)

Brand New Resource - Prep Week (20:18)

How to Price Your Mini Sessions for Profit

Have you ever felt like you're working hard, but you're not sure that you're seeing the profit from? Have you ever wondered if you're even covering your costs and making this thing worth it? Whether you're a numbers person or not, learning to calculate your Cost of Doing Business is a must! In the simplest terms you make sure all expenses and taxes are covered in your revenue AND you're paying yourself. Statistics show that most photographers don't make it past year 3. This is solely because they don't price their work appropriately.

Gather Your Numbers

Step one you need to list EVERY expense you have. Let's take your Spring Minis Sessions for example! List out any expenses that would go towards them including softwares like your CRM (gallery delivery), Lightroom or Imagine AI (your editing software), email marketing, google domain, website costs, gear, props or client gifts, etc! If you pay for something annually divide it by 12 to give you a monthly amount. Next, calculate the number of hours you spend on Spring Minis. Don't just include your shooting time! List the time spent marketing, driving to locations, editing and post processing! Lastly, ask yourself: how much do I want to be paid for my hourly rate? And please pay yourself more than a teenager who works at Costco! I suggest no less than $50/hour because you are well worth your time!

Calculating Your Numbers

In any given month for Spring Minis list how many sessions you realistically want to book. For example's sake we'll say 16 (that's 2 days of minis). Here's where gathering your numbers come into play. How many hours will you spend on these specific Mini Sessions (for everyone it's different, but remember to include marketing, post processing/editing, shooting time). So, you should have your total number of expenses for one month and the number of hours you will work for these sessions. Take your hourly rate multiplied by the number of hours for these sessions and that's your profit. Next, take your expenses and add them to your profit amount. Finally, divide that number by 16 (the amount of sessions) and this gives you the bare minimum you should be charging for your Mini Sessions! If this amounts to less than $150 you should consider either recalculating your expenses or paying yourself more. It's a good rule of thumb that Minis start at $150 and go up.

Price Your Mini Sessions with Confidence

By running your CODB, you can confidently price your mini sessions for profit. This way you cover your expenses, pay yourself a fair wage, and generate profit for long-term success. If you plan on doing Spring Minis you need to register for my brand new (FREE) 4 day training! It's called PREP WEEK! Essentially I am coming alongside you, and together, we are prepping out our Spring Mini sessions. Get all the details and register for Prep Week HERE!

106. Planning Your 2025 Mini-Sessions

Rebecca Rice — Thu, 23 Jan 2025 07:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts |Spotify |Transcript

As we're headed into this new year and our Mini Sessions season I wanted to talk through the importance of planning EARLY! January is the perfect time to set the tone for your year. Preparation like this will set you up for success and why not determine this year to be your most profitable!? In this episode not only will you learn why planning ahead is valuable, but you'll understand what happens when you don't. So, for starters let's look at key reasons why planning your Mini Sessions early is a must!

Why Planning Your Mini Sessions Early is Valuable

In order to plan ahead you need at least 6-8 weeks before your Mini Sessions take place. When you start marketing early you get ahead of other photographers! Why not be the first photographer seen by your audience for Spring Minis and beat the competition? Rather than scrambling last minute to do Easter Minis or Wildflowers, you can prepare now and get fully booked! This also means you'll be maximizing your profits. You get the opportunity to think through your pricing, structure and upselling. And the best part is you can do it all--stress free!

Key Areas to Prep

One thing you need to look at is the calendar as a whole. Start with your personal calendar including birthdays, vacations, important dates. Then you can pencil in dates for Mini Sessions. That way you aren't overbooked and you have control of when you work! My suggestion would be to look at doing Spring, Fall and Christmas Minis. Next, an area you want to plan is thinking through the themes that you could potentially have for your Mini Sessions. You want to think of fun, creative ideas, but things that your clients will actually book. Lastly, plan ahead in your marketing plan! Put together a real strategy including your email list, your SEO and your socials. Trust me, good marketing takes time so tackle this early and give yourself the ability to be profitable.

What Happens If You Don't Plan

I know there are so many things you have to think about when planning your Mini Sessions, but that's why I'm here! You won't be doing this alone. The danger in not being proactive is you'll be stressed out, overwhelmed, losing clients or missing out on profits! The earlier you start preparing the better off you'll be. Throughout the coming weeks I'll walk through all the important keys in planning your Mini Sessions! Tune in next week for specifics on pricing to be profitable!

What We Covered:

Why I started planning ahead (1:55)

Why planning your mini sessions early is valuable (3:03)

Key areas to prep (6:08)

What happens if you don't plan (11:00)

105. Minis Made Easy

Rebecca Rice — Thu, 16 Jan 2025 08:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts |Spotify |Transcript

If you're a family photographer looking for mini session tips to simplify your business while maximizing profits, you’re in the right place! I'm thrilled to announce the rebrand of my podcast: Minis Made Easy. This podcast is your go-to resource for everything mini sessions—helping you streamline workflows, master posing, and build a profitable photography business. The goal is to leave you inspired, provide actionable tips and educational content tailored for your photography business! I've discovered a major part of my why in this industry is to help other photographers in their journey. And friend, it all starts with mini sessions!

Why Focus on Mini Sessions?

Profitability and Scalability: Minis allow you to serve more clients in less time while still providing an excellent experience. Simplified Marketing: With clear themes and short time slots, minis are easier to market and fill. Community Demand: Many photographers shared their struggles and questions about making minis work. This rebrand allows us to address those needs in-depth.

What Can You Expect from Minis Made Easy?

Each episode is tailored specifically to help you master mini-sessions. Here’s a sneak peek into what we’ll cover! Workflows: Learn how to streamline booking processes, client communication, and gallery delivery for a seamless client experience. Posing Tips: Discover techniques for maximizing short 10-minute sessions while keeping your posing natural and stress-free. Business Strategies: Get insights into pricing your minis for profit, marketing effectively, and scaling your mini-session offerings. Creative Inspiration: Stay ahead of the curve with fresh seasonal themes and evergreen session ideas that clients will love.

You can count on this podcast to serve you in key areas! I'll be breaking down the how, what and when for successful Mini Sessions and be sharing all the mini session tips. Let’s simplify the way you run your business while making your minis more profitable than ever.

104. How To Set Boundaries With Difficult Clients

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 31 Jul 2023 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts |Spotify |Transcript

More Resources: Portrait Contract Template | Free Business & Marketing Class

This is one of those topics that, although it's not fun, is necessary. Especially as we head into a busy season you need to know how to set boundaries with difficult clients! After being in this industry for years I'll just let you know that if you haven't had a challenging client... they're coming. Which is why this episode will be helpful! I'll share some of my personal experience and give you pointers on how to work with them. But before unpacking that, I have a free class just for you! It's all about how to double your photography revenue this year. We'll touch on some business basics but dive deeper into business marketing! Rather than relying solely on pretty pictures you can drive your business with excellent marketing. Now, onto the "fun" clients...

Stay Professional and Kind

It is so important to deal with clients with kindness. Remember, you're running a business and your conversation or interaction represents the brand/the business. It's very easy to match your client's attitude and energy especially if you don't mind confrontation. Some of you may be people pleasers and negative confrontation is a challenge, but remember kindness goes a long way. Stay professional and give your client a hefty helping of kindness! You have an opportunity to handle situations with grace and I suggest doing it over the phone. You don't want to give clients ammunition so even an email would be beneficial.

Refer to Your Contract

Pointing back to your contract gives you a backbone to lean on. And that's why it's crucial to have a legal contract that will hold up. I have one in my shop you can grab and they are there for a reason! A few things I have in my contract that protects me is found in editing. I have it in my contract that I do not remove things that wouldn't be gone on their own within 1-2 weeks. I won't altar someone's body because all bodies are beautiful and deserve to be captured. I also hold the right to including or excluding photos from their gallery. Sometimes the shot is blurry or simply doesn't turn out. I want to include photos that will not only be a good representation of my work but turn out well!

Give a Yes with a Boundary

This is one of my favorites because it helps you illuminate the positivity and serve your client but protects you as well. You need to be taken care of which is why we are talking about how to set boundaries with difficult clients! So, give your client a yes but with a realistic boundary. For example, if a client wants something edited that's outside of your normal scope of editing. Maybe they want a car removed but the session was in a city. You can say yes, but only for 3 photos. Don't be a doormat, but serve your clients and try to go above and beyond.

Avoid Burning Bridges

I've had clients in the past that posed challenges and gave opportunity for me to respond by burning the bridge so to speak. But because I chose to be kind or work through it with them I gained a client who books over and over again with me. Some clients threaten to leave terrible reviews or just look for the negativity, however, you can always offer a full refund and just delete their gallery. If you can avoid that, do it! Find the resolution! But at the end of the day you may need a "do not book" list.

Hopefully these were some practical things for you to apply. Don't stress or be intimidated by challenging clients. Try to find a solution and always extend KINDNESS! The world as a whole needs more of it and why not let your business reputation be that you were professional and incredibly kind.

What We Covered:

Stay Professional and Kind (7:42)

Refer to Your Contract (9:28)

Give a Yes with a Boundary (13:23)

Avoid Burning Bridges (15:11)

103. Mini-Sessions Q&A

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 10 Jul 2023 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts |Spotify |Transcript

More Resources: Live Webinar | Posing Workflow | Contract

Let's talk about Mini Sessions! I'm doing a Mini Sessions Q & A from a thread in my Facebook group. There were tons of great inquiries so I'm taking the time to go through and answer now! I'm also hosting a LIVE webinar this coming Thursday (if you're reading this current and up to date) all about MINI SESSIONS! This is a brand new class I've never taught and we'll have a Q&A section at the end for that too! So, if today's podcast hits home you'll definitely want to join. Be sure to register HERE regardless of if you can make it live or not. Thursday, July 13th @ 1:00pm CST. Once you register you'll receive the replay and get all the fresh content. Now, let's jump in!

What do you do with uncooperative kids?

This specific question stated, "If your sessions are 20 minutes and one of your children doesn't cooperate what do you do?" Here's the thing, my mini sessions are 10 minutes and most of my students do 15 minutes. So, when a child is crying the whole session or not wanting to participate you just do your best. If you're booking with a family and the parent knows ahead of time the child will struggle, opt for a full session. So what do you do? Keep snapping, try posing different angles to avoid the crying face, book with them in 6 months from now! Most of the time kids are uncooperative because it's new. I did this with a family and the second session was incredible. We got to celebrate the major growth. I'm also a believer in capturing true memories. The reality is kids cry. They don't always cooperate and that's part of life's memories!

How do you advertise your minis?

This is a loaded question because there is so much that goes into marketing. Join the free class to go deeper! I would say good advertising doesn't just post to your business Facebook page or Instagram. You need all the pieces of the puzzle to present a full picture.

How do you get comfortable with short time slots?

Practice, practice, practice! Start at 15 minutes and use a posing workflow. If you're worried about clients feeling like they aren't served well, it's because you need confidence in your delivery. It's important to know you've captured the right shots so you can deliver a full gallery. But how do you get to this place? Practice. Have family and friends over and do 15 minute sessions with them back to back. I use this posing workflow for all my sessions and that's how I've managed to do 10 minutes at a time!

What We Covered:

What do you do with uncooperative kids? (4;03)

How do you advertise your minis? (8:33)

How do you get comfortable with short time slots? (9:24)

102. Tips For Doing A Christmas In July Mini-Sessions Promotion

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 26 Jun 2023 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts |Spotify |Transcript

More Resources: $3k Mini Sessions Blueprint | Portrait Contract | Questionnaire | Email Templates | Client Experience Guide| Dubsado Discount

All month long we've been talking about our Christmas in July Minis Campaign. Today, I'm so excited to finish this out with tips for ding a Christmas in July Mini Sessions Promotion! It's hard to believe we are at the end of June and our promos will be ready to go live soon. Before wrapping up how to do this promo I have a FREE guide to help you make your first $3k or more on your first set up mini sessions. Count it as a gift for those of you that have followed along and apply it during your actual Christmas Minis! Ready for some big tips?

Get Started...NOW!

I know we're down to the wire, but it's not too late to get started! Ideally you want to kick off this campaign at the beginning of July. I know you technically have a whole month, but you don't want to promote this at the end. Start the first week when this campaign is fresh and no one has been advertised to yet. That also means you need promo shots! If you're doing Red Truck Minis, Tree Farm or Indoor Studio Christmas Minis, talk to your vendor and see if you can get in there with a real family for promos. Make sure they are real families because they advertise so much better. Don't just show the setup. And of course use past sessions if you have them!

How Long Do You Advertise?

I suggest advertising for 2 weeks or until your spots fill. I have an associate team spread out in 9 different cities and in Dallas we open up July 1st. Our goal is to book 3 dates which is the equivalent of 54 sessions. Remember, I have multiple photographers so it's not all one person. We start by opening to our VIP email list, social posts ready to go and fb ads! These are all things we've prepped in June which makes it a lot easier with automated workflows. Once the 2 weeks is up, we switch to advertise Fall minis. We book these from mid-July to the end of August or so. Then we switch back to Christmas Minis!

Hot Topic Question

Something I get asked often is whether or not to take a retainer. We do a 50% retainer at the time of booking and they pay the rest later. This has worked really well. Just be sure you're taking some sort of retainer. Don't let clients book a spot and pay later because they often cancel. And along with that, have your clients fill out a contract. This is vital for your business. If you're using one you just found on the internet and it's not written by a lawyer it most likely will not hold up in court. I have one in my shop that I use for every session and it was written by a lawyer so you can trust the language is legal!

Set Up Automations

If you have time this one is a big one! It will save you so much time in the long run, especially when you're in the thick of busy season. Most CRMs have automations for you to use so contracts get sent, invoice reminders go out and all the things. My automations include sending out my Questionnaire, Email Templates, and Client Experience Guide. It takes some effort to get it initially going, but it is well worth it! My preferred CRM is Dubsado and if your a Profitable Minis 2.0 student I have an entire module walking you through it. If you're not a PMC 2.0 student don't worry, it's opening soon!

There you have it, so many big tips and all to help you get a jumpstart on Christmas in July!

What We Covered:

Get Started...NOW! (3:52)

How Long Do You Advertise? (7:40)

Hot Topic Question (11:45)

Set Up Automations (14:01)

101. 5 Reasons You Should Do a 'Christmas in July' Mini Sessions Promotion

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 12 Jun 2023 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts |Spotify |Transcript

More Resources: Free Minis Class

Do you have a Christmas in July promotion? Today I'm unfolding the 5 reasons you SHOULD do a 'Christmas in July' Mini Session promo. But before we start the countdown, be sure to grab this FREE class all about mini sessions. As fall mini sessions are around the corner, this will be incredible useful for you. It walks you through the main marketing tips to get you fully booked! Now let's talk about Christmas in July!

Greater Exposure

Let me clarify, I am not suggesting you shoot mini sessions in July! I grew up in Texas and I couldn't imagine going out in the brutal heat for 2-3 hours of mini sessions especially as Christmas! I am talking about doing a promotion to book those minis in October. Each year I do Red Truck Minis and some sort of indoor studio Christmas minis. For my Christmas in July promo I book out my Red Truck Minis that I shoot in October. A big reason I love doing this promo is because my business gets put in front of A LOT of eyes. Red Truck Minis are desirable and capture the attention of clients.

Get Ahead of Demand

For too long I waited to advertise mini sessions when I started hearing people ask for them. The goal here is to advertise and make Christmas Minis available before your clients request it! You will be the first ones to mention these minis and chances are clients will stick with you because you brought it to them first!

Kickstarter

Good marketing takes time and that means at least 6-8 weeks. Doing this in July gives you a major kickstart to the busiest time of the year! Regardless of whether or not your spots are fully booked, you're relieving the pressure by starting early. Once you've done the promo the ground work has already been laid and when Fall comes you will easily book out the rest. You won't be scrambling to get promo shots or workflows ready. You'll be prepped!

Influx of Revenue

July is usually a slower month for mini sessions, so having something in this month carries you over to busy season! We collect 50% retainers (which I highly suggest you do) to lock clients in. This is a nice perk to having some sort of income during summer. For some of you that alone is enough!

Overall Estimate

The last reason I love doing a 'Christmas in July' promotion is you'll have a good expectation for your Fall. For one, you know what to expect from the second half of your booked sessions. But it also gives you a gauge of people's interest. Many clients may see your promotion and decide to book a fall mini with you. They may not be ready to jump to Christmas, however, it gets the ball moving for the next season!

I hope this encourages you to give it a try! There's a lot of beneficial components that come into play here. Start prepping and get your Christmas in July promo ready!

What We Covered:

Greater Exposure (4:42)

Get Ahead of Demand (5:37)

Kickstarter (7:19)

Influx of Revenue (9:08)

Overall Estimate (10:45)

100. 1-0-0 Episodes: A Look Back At How It All Began

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 29 May 2023 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts |Spotify |Transcript

More Resources: Free $3k Blueprint

We're at episode 100!!! I'm thrilled to be able to look back and share how this began as well as how it evolved along the way. It's going to be fun, but before heading down memory lane I have something ALL about mini sessions for you. My students call me the Queen of Mini Sessions and it truly is the bread and butter of my business. I've learned a lot over the years and put together a blueprint for you to follow! If you've never made $3000 in a single day (2-3 hours) of mini sessions then be sure to grab this! It's called the "$3k Mini Sessions Blueprint" and lays out exactly how to structure a mini sessions day. This will be so helpful for Fall Minis just around the corner! Now, let's go back in time...

Not a Glamorous Start

Back in 2020, we uprooted our family and moved to Nashville, TN! We were living in a townhome waiting for our house to be built and The Business Journey Podcast was birthed. We didn't have a studio, but my husband wanted to make sure it sounded excellent. So, we set up the computer, the microphone and there I was in my closet recording my first episode! I say this because not all starts are glamorous. Maybe you're not starting a podcast, but whatever it is just go for it. It doesn't have to be perfect or look like your long term vision. For me, I had this dream of being able to serve and connect with you in a way that was a lot more personal than just an email. And now, here we are!

Short and Sweet

Knowing the audience I have I wanted to be intentional to make episode consumable. Most of you are on the go, busy running a business or in the thick of it with family! That means you've got maybe 15 minutes in the car to listen in. When creating episodes I had to make it short, sweet and to the point. After all, the intention is to serve you with valuable content. Allowing you into my life and equipping you with business related content! This journey has not always been easy, but now 100 deep I am happy to say so worth it!

What Do You Want to Hear?

The goal of this podcast is to talk through topics or things that serve you well. I'd really love to hear from you! So, send me a DM and let me know what you'd like to see in the next 100. Maybe there's a special guest you'd like to hear from or topics for your business you need covered. I want to dive into areas that help you grow and give you insight. I always pepper in more personal subjects that allow you to have eyes into my life and business because I believe we grow from one another! Your voice is incredibly valuable to me so send an email with feedback or shoot me a DM. I take your suggestions to my team so we can coordinate and serve you better.

There's lots more inside the podcast, but I want to finish by saying THANK YOU! You truly are the reason we've gone this far and I'm proud of what we've been able to do in just 100 episodes. Tune in and reach out. I'd love to hear from all of you.

What We Covered:

Not a Glamorous Start (3:29)

Short and Sweet (7:23)

What Do You Want to Hear? (11:29)

99. A Day In The Life - What My Schedule Really Looks Like

Rebecca Rice — Thu, 18 May 2023 06:00:00 -0500

More Resources: Free $3k Blueprint

I felt it would be helpful for other business owners and photographers to hear what my schedule really looks like! I want to pull you in behind the curtain to see how I go about a typical business day. But, before jumping into those details I do have a FREE blueprint to help you successfully navigate a day of minis. If you've never made $3000 on a single day of minis then you definitely need to grab this guide! Now, I was at the Graceful Gathering conference speaking when a photographer asked me about the structure of my business day. I'm very strategic in what that looks like and there's been an evolution throughout the years. I started part time, moved to full time with kids then to adding team members. So, what's worked best for me...

Focused Work Hours

I am not the best at multi-tasking. I'm a mom of 2 little ones and I also enjoy my work. With that being said, I currently have my kids in a hybrid homeschool. On Tuesday, Wednesday and Thursday my kids are at school or with Mimi and I can solely work on my business. My work day starts at 8:00am and kick it off with meetings on Tuesday. I will say my business has grown and I have a staff team. So when I'm not "in the office" they are still getting work done. It's incredible, and yes, it is possible! Next, I hone in on projects like culling sessions or tasks from team call. I stop working my work days at noon. And fun fact, I take a nap EVERY day. It fits perfectly into my afternoon right before I need to pick up kids!

Intentional Use of Time

Since I only work about 10-12 hours a week I have to utilize my time efficiently. I use filters to place priority on things. For instance, if it requires my face - YouTube, Instagram stories, etc. If it uses my voice - podcasts, interviews, etc. Or just showing up in communities on Facebook and lastly things like strategy or launches fall on my plate. Everything else I pass on to other team members. That's why I have a team under me to be able to accomplish everything while still being able to have a work week that looks like this. Now, I still have slack and voxer on my phone so my team can reach me throughout the week. But I strive to stay in my zone of genius while serving my family and business well. This took years of trial and error, but I finally feel like I've figured out what works for me.

Next Steps

If you're a solo-preneur this can be hard to imagine. But I hope this episode at least encouraged you that it is possible! Feel free to DM with any questions because I would love to help you get to your dream. If you want to work towards a lifestyle like this, I encourage you to start with just one team member. Find one thing you can outsource. Inbox, editing, etc! My first team member was hired as an outside contractor and I paid them $30/hr for 10 hours a week. Because I got 10 extra hours in my month I was able to book more sessions and bring in more income! So, start somewhere and begin taking those steps to creating your dream work life. There's so much more in the podcast so be sure to give it a listen and get yourself in the place you want to be!

What We Covered:

Focused Work Hours (5:04)

Intentional Use of Time (9:17)

Next Steps (17:56)

98. Secrets To Successful Model Calls

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 01 May 2023 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

More Resources: Free Class | Client Experience Guide | Portrait Contract Template

Let's dive into the topic of model calls. I get asked about this often and today I'll be sharing some secrets to successful model calls! How do you run one, what are they useful for, how do you set them up. Before we get into the all the good things, I've got a FREE class for those of you that are ready to go beyond simply taking pretty pictures. It's called "6 Steps to Double Your Revenue" and full of educational content you can start applying to your business. This class walks through the importance of having a true marketing strategy so you can bring in more revenue.

What's the Purpose?

There are definitely right and wrong ways to do a model call. First, you need to know what the goal is. Are you trying to grow your portfolio or like me, when I first moved to Nashville, you're starting over with your clientele? Maybe you're needing more content that you can blog about! Whatever it is you need to clearly define the purpose. If you just say you're doing a free shoot, people will come flocking! Be clear on what you're looking for. Lifestyle newborns, multiple siblings in the session, etc.

Model Call Structure

I set up my model call similar to a mini session. I'll give 5 free photos, but deliver a full gallery! Most of the time clients will purchase the full gallery. There are some important things you should require like having clients follow your style guide. You should pick the location and state that the session is 30-60 minutes or however long you need. I use my Client Experience Guide to help them choose outfits and make sure they send photos beforehand so I know what to expect! Remember, it's a model call which means it's for your business.

Grow Your Email List

This is a valuable opportunity to collect emails and grow your list. In order for people to apply for your model call you can get their info from a form. You can include questions to help with the verification process. I have them include a photo of who they will have in their session. It adds an extra layer of protection to be sure you have the models needed! And the best part is by having them on your email list when you advertise for sessions later in the year they often book you.

Model Call Must

Use a contract! Yes, it's a free session, but having a contract guarantees everyone is clear on expectations and what's included. This protects you and will let them know what will be delivered. Be sure you don't diy your contract, but use one that's been written by a lawyer so it will hold up in court should that ever take place. I have one you can grab HERE that I use for all my sessions!

Model calls can be incredibly helpful and a success for achieving goals. Give it a try and see what happens for your business!

What We Covered:

What's the Purpose? (2:28)

Model Call Structure (4:16)

Grow Your Email List (9:02)

Model Call Must (11:06)

97. What Does Freedom Look Like For You?

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 17 Apr 2023 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

Let’s continue a conversation that got started on my Instagram a few weeks back. What does freedom look like for you? This is a convo worth having friends! As we come into the new year I like choosing a word to move forward on for the year. This year I decided that my word was simple. I want to enjoy the simple life that I’ve come to love! It may seem boring to others, but for me it’s not a common freedom in our industry.

We All Need Freedom

The thing about freedom is it looks different from one person to the next. I have enjoyed baking bread which is a long process, I love reading while watching my kids play outside and I thrive when I get to take a nap in the middle of the afternoon. You didn’t become a business owner to quit a 9 to 5 job just so you could start working 24/7. But the reality is, if we aren’t intentional to carve out freedom in our day we’ll become so consumed with our businesses we don’t end up living a full life! Hear me, I am so thankful for my business and I enjoy doing what I do. But I started it so I could have time with my family, travel and have a say in what my day looks like.

What Does Freedom Look Like For You?

If money was no object, you could do anything you put your heart to? What would you do in your life? Once you discover what kind of things give you life and bring you joy you can structure your business accordingly! You can allow yourself to have the freedom to do the things that bring you joy.

Make Goals

The first step is defining what freedom looks like, then start making some adjustments in your work. If money is the problem, start setting a goal of 1 more session per month. Start making some of those changes to allow yourself the ability to do what you’ve always wished you could do. Maybe that’s reading 12 books a year? Start by giving yourself 15 minutes in your work day to do it. These moments of doing what you want will refuel your tank and give you the extra push to tackle your business goals!

If you have questions or want some feedback, DM me on Instagram! It’s really me in there responding to your comments and messages and I’d love to hear from you.

What We Covered:

We All Need Freedom (5:42)

What Does Freedom Look Like For You? (11:18)

Make Goals (12:47)

96. How I Use StoryBrand In My Business

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 03 Apr 2023 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

More Resources: Free Class | StoryBrand Script

Welcome to the Business Journey Podcast! Today I'm sharing all about how I use StoryBrand in my business! I also have a FREE class that will be helpful this Spring in your sessions. It's called "Keys to Effective Family Posing" and you'll walk away with creative ideas on how to pose well! Posing isn't something you should "wing" but rather something you excel at. Now, StoryBrand is something that comes from a book by Donald Miller called "Building a StoryBrand". Let's dive in!

StoryBrand Outline

This has been incredibly helpful for me in marketing. The StoryBrand script starts with the main character, villain and guide. The main character is your client! Then we look at who their villain is. Maybe their villain is a lack of time. It breaks down why they don't have time, what that makes them feel and what they are being robbed of. Next the outline introduces the guide who comes in and brings a solution to their problem (that's YOU)!

Mapped Out Process

Once all the people are in place we get to build this story. Maybe you have 3 or 4 steps that's going to take them to their answer. It's going to lead the client to a place of finally getting to book with you. You'll list out steps for clients to take to get photos taken with you! Along the way you're answering questions, removing fear or doubt, etc.

Call to Action

Finally, we give our clients the invitation to do something. Make the change of feeling like time is robbing them and giving clear steps for them to book with you! You can address the issue and boldly state, if they don't make a change they miss out on these memories for life! I know that seems intense, but you're making a clear story here. You want your client to relate and see the reality of their current decisions. It's a call to act!

Market with StoryBrand

This is an awesome way to emphasize your brand messaging through marketing. There's more in the podcast and I breakdown the application in depth so be sure to listen! Marketing just got easier with this StoryBrand outline in place. I encourage you to follow the script and create your own StoryBrand HERE!

What We Discussed

StoryBrand Outline (3:10)

Mapped Out Process (9:07)

Call to Action (11:23)

Market with StoryBrand (15:25)

95. How To Market Your Mini-Sessions In 2023

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 20 Mar 2023 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

More Resources: 6 Steps to Double Your Photography Revenue | Mini Sessions Playbook | FB Ad Tutorial

Let's talk about how to MARKET your mini sessions in 2023. I know we've talked about marketing before, but times are changing and this episode has some new things that need applying! Before jumping in I'm so excited to share a NEW live class I'm offering. It's called the "6 Steps to Double Your Photography Revenue" and let me just say it's possible to double what you did last year! I'm sharing the 6 steps I did in my own business so I know they work. Be sure to register and save your seat so you don't miss out on 2023 strategies! Now let's get to how to market your mini sessions in 2023...

Give Yourself a Head Start

The ideal amount of time to market for minis is 6-8 weeks. The absolute minimum is 4 weeks, but the more time the more likely you are to be fully booked! First, pick out your date and work backwards from there. If you're not sure what the timeline should look like you can grab my Mini Sessions Playbook!

Get Your Promo Shots

Next you need to have photos for advertisement! I try using photos of the location from previous years or go out and get them now. If the weather isn't working or they are seasonal minis like blue bonnets, cherry blossoms, etc. use a stock photo! Never use another photographer's work as your advertisement - it's illegal. And I've seen this a lot, try to stick with just one photo.

Open to VIPs First

When it comes to advertising, start with your email list. And more specifically your VIP list! That's basically clients or people that have joined your email list. Do this before going public on your social media and opening it to the public. I've got more to say on this topic that applies to 2023 in the podcast so be sure to listen!

Run Facebook & Instagram Ads

I normally wouldn't push this, but this day and age requires us to utilize ads. Facebook and Instagram want you to pay for advertising and if you don't it's likely your posts won't be seen. The Facebook/Instagram advertising platform is very intuitive. You can target a dream client and truly get in front of them! The best part is you can see your return on investment due to analytics! Trust me and give this a shot after you've exhausted your free advertisement!

Be sure to give this episode a listen and don't forget to register for the FREE live class this week!

What We Discussed

Give Yourself a Head Start (3:56)

Get Your Promo Shots (5:30)

Open to VIPs First (8:30)

Run Facebook & Instagram Ads (9:39)

94. How To Confidently Price Your Sessions In 2023

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 06 Mar 2023 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

More Resources: Free Minis Class | Facebook Community | CODB Tutorial

I get this question ALL the time, especially in our facebook community. And if you're not a part you can click the link above and check it out! Today I'll be sharing how to confidently price your sessions because a lot of you have been asking. Before diving into my photography pricing tips, I do want to offer you a FREE class I have called "Booked Out Minis." Now, let's figure out how to confidently price your sessions so we're ready for Spring Minis!

Run Your CODB

Before committing to any kind of pricing you want to be sure you've ran your cost of doing business. If you don't know what that is, basically it is discovering how much you're actually making per hour. Not just the time that you're shooting, but the time that you're driving to the session, setting up editing, communicating with clients, delivering galleries, all of the things that go into making a photo session happen. You can watch THIS video to find out your CODB. This is your first step when it comes to pricing!

Don't Overcomplicate It

Rather than having a ton of different priced packages stick with a simple rate. It sounds like a good idea to have all these session types listed on your website, but for clients it's overwhelming. Especially when they're priced similarly! I have my portrait session package and it's for any type of session that somebody wants to do with me. We're talking families, birthdays, couples, maternity seniors - any kind of portrait session. I have one session fee and it includes the full gallery, it's very simple to understand! Listen to the podcast to find out which packages should be priced differently.

Commit to Keeping Prices

Here's a good rule: don't touch your prices after changing them for at least 6 months. Most of the time photographers go up in price and freak out if they aren't getting booked! Here's what I've learned, it's not a pricing problem it's a marketing problem! Ask yourself...How do you need to market differently to the people in that price point? And does your client experience justify the pricing? Maybe you can tweak a few of these things and see a whole new client group!

There you have it! My photography pricing tips! Lastly, I do have something coming soon that will help your photography business tremendously. So stay tuned on my socials and get your business ready!

What We Discussed

Run Your CODB (3:05)

Don't Overcomplicate It (6:15)

Commit to Keep Prices (9:19)

93. How to Build a Portfolio of Images You LOVE (When You're Just Starting Out)

Rebecca Rice — Thu, 26 Jan 2023 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

More Resources: The Ultimate Guide to Mastering Manual Mode | Client Experience Guide | Flodesk Discount | Behind the Lens

I get this question all the time so I wanted this episode to answer it with practicality! I've had to do this not only when I first started, but also when I moved states. I had no portfolio in my new location and no client base. So having gone through this twice now I feel I have some wisdom to share. Before answer how to build a portfolio of images you love I wanted to give you a FREE resource to help those that are just starting. This class, The Ultimate Guide to Mastering Manual Mode, will help you take your photography to the next level! It will walk you through set up to make sure you're doing things right and have the correct settings.

Ask Family & Friends to Model

There are more than enough people willing to model for you, especially when it's free! This is valuable because you're able to build a portfolio and advertise. Now, I will advise you to give them a style guide. You want them to help showcase your style and work so giving them instruction is vital! If you don't have a style guide you can grab mine in my shop. It's called a Client Experience Guide because it's packed with more than just styling tips. You'll also find it useful for sessions with paying clients! Family and friends are often the people that want to support you and this is a perfect way for them to do it.

Host an Official Model Call

This is something you post online that calls for specific models. For example, you're looking for a family with 2 older kids and 1 baby. I include 5 free images for their time, I kind of treat it like a mini session, then upsell the full gallery! And this is usually a full session, so I'm shooting for 30 minutes to an hour. The amazing thing is I've never done one without the clients buying because the session itself was free! They get the full gallery 60-100 images for a discount of $200 as well since it's a model call. You can book these in local mom groups and they let it happen because it's free! But note, this still needs a contract in place! It protects you and the client and if you don't have one you can grab mine in the shop.

Social Strategies

Keep in mind that you want to show what you desire to shoot more of. Use locations that showcase your style. The same goes for outfits on your clients. Think of yourself as a museum curated. Only showcase the most excellent images. You want to display what your photography looks like. Curate your feed on IG and select only the images that are the best of your work. I have an entire masterclass on this featured in Behind the Lens. If you aren't a part of that membership, you are missing out! So check it out and let it serve you!

These are some easy ways on how to build a portfolio of images you love (especially if you're just starting out). Don't forget to grab that free class or any of the resources listed above and start curating that portfolio!

What We Discussed

Ask Family & Friends to Model (3:21)

Host an Official Model Call (6:16)

Social Strategies (11:07)

92. What To Do When Life Happens

Rebecca Rice — Thu, 12 Jan 2023 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

More Resources: 3K Mini Sessions Blueprint

Welcome to the new year friends! Seems a bit wild that we are already getting settled into 2023, but I wanted to talk to you about what to do when life happens. I wasn't sure if I was going to share, however, I know this is common and real! Before unraveling what took place for me and my family back in September I do have a FREE blueprint called the 3k Mini Sessions Blueprint. If you want to run profitable mini sessions this Spring you should grab this free resource. It's actually the right time to start prepping for Spring and I want you to successfully execute those! If you've never made $3000 in a single date of minis it's your year to do just that. Ok, are you ready to hear why I didn't work for a whole month?! Here's what to do when life happens and what exactly took place in September!

The Backstory

I have two kids, a girl and boy who I absolutely adore. My daughter is in a hybrid homeschool so she's at school for three days and the other two she's home and we do homeschool. My son is three years old and just started a new preschool this fall. And this year we sought out to potty train him. It was on and off since January, but we were hopeful it would click for him over the summer. Wrong! He's very strong willed and also doesn't care if he's messy or running a muck. Such a boy! Well, the preschool (like most) required him to be fully potty trained. He would have days where he was good and then days where I literally followed him around naked because it was accident after accident. Any mamas out there that can relate?!

So when September came and he wasn't allowed in school, I had to step in majorly as mom and get this resolved! That also meant an unexpected month away from the business. So what did I learn that could hopefully help you know what to do when life happens?

Be Realistic with Time and Energy

I knew I couldn't be at my computer for extended periods of time and some days not at all. And following around a toddler leaves you feeling drained. I had to figure out what was the bare minimum in my business. So, I made a list of must-have to-dos that my business needed from me. I suggest you do the same for these emergencies that pop up. Then go through and determine what is the bare minimum of what's required. Blogging will probably be on pause, book keeping may pile up a bit, etc. Think through the vital items and only put your hand to that.

Reevaluate Goals

Sometimes it's disheartening to adjust your quarterly business goals, but it's necessary. I had to look at my goals and determine what was most important. In that season I knew we wouldn't hit our business goals, but my son officially being potty trained was. These were long and challenging days, but I had quality time with him that I won't forget. So, business owner, photographer, mom... it is ok to adjust your goals!

Give Yourself Grace

You need to give yourself permission to step back and be where you're needed most. That's also the freedom of being business owners! It can be daunting to serve other areas of your life and put business on the wayside. But when you have things in place to navigate what to do when life happens makes it doable. Give yourself grace to put first things first! The season won't last forever and the "norm" will return.

What We Discussed

The Backstory (3:12)

Be Realistic with Time & Energy (9:09)

Reevaluate Goals (16:37)

Give Yourself Grace (19:36)

91. A Look Back at 2022

Rebecca Rice — Thu, 29 Dec 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

More Resources: Free Class | Episode 90

Here we are at the end of the year already and one of the things I like to do is take a look back at 2022. What are our wins, our challenges and how did the year overall look!? This was a transitional year and that often poses challenges, but I know I'm a better person because of it too. I do have a free class for you all about mini sessions. Whether you've tried running minis, failed or just want to grow this class is for you! You'll learn how to structure and market your minis well. It's definitely a class favorite so check that out! Ok, a look back at 2022... this was a fast yet slow year. We accomplished so much and I wanted to open this up so you can see into what family and business looks like for me.

New for the Business

I was able to hire on two new members. One on the education side and one on the Wisp and Willow side of things. I knew I would hire but didn't realize we would need two! I was also part of mastermind after saying I wouldn't be. Last year I was in a mastermind and it was incredible so I thought I would use all of this year to just implement everything I had learned. Well, I was wrong! An opportunity to be in Katelyn James' mastermind presented itself and I just couldn't pass it up. I am so glad I didn't because it was a great way to invest in myself and my business. I highly encourage you check that out and let it add amazing value to what you do! Another new thing for the business front was getting much stricter on my work hours. It was a goal to set rhythms, routines, and boundaries. I enjoy working so placing some work hours and sticking to them have helped me be the best version of myself in all aspects of life.

New for the Family

This one arrived at the end of the year. But I am so glad it has; we've found a good family rhythm! After ten months I can confidently say we've cracked our family code and know what works. We started my daughter in Acton Academy. It's a non traditional micro school, that is big on training up independence and giving kids the freedom to learn at their own pace. They truly foster a love for learning and it's blessed my family so much! There are Acton schools all over so if this peaks your interest I highly suggest looking into it. The one we're a part of is under a home school umbrella, so three days a week are in school and the other two days we homeschool. We also found a preschool for my son in October that coordinated with my daughter's school! This was a really big deal and there's more to it in the podcast so give it a listen!

Travel Happened

As I take a look back at 2022 I realized we traveled A LOT. Travel with my husband, for work and for family. I grew up traveling and seriously enjoy it. My husband and I sat down and looked at our calendar to decide when we wanted to travel, how much and what were the best times to do it. This was definitely our most successful year when it comes coordinating that. We might have traveled more than Daniel, my husband, wanted to but we planned it all together. That makes a HUGE difference. Doing this opened up the potential for an incredible year in 2023. I encourage you to bring your family into this process, give them ownership and say and you'll enjoy the planning together!

Scheduled Slow Days

One of the things we did in 2022 was plan slower days. It's easy to fly by the seat of your pants and get overwhelmed by the busyness of owning a business. A benefit of owning a business is determining your schedule. My husband and I created intentional space in our calendar and made sure we set boundaries so rest and slow days actually happened. Especially when you have kids, your pace of life just looks different. Rather than rushing through this season we want to soak it in and get the most out of it. So making a point to have slower days and make space for all the things is important!

Maybe this episode is not one you personal resonate with, but it's valuable to look back at 2022 and see what all took place. It fuels you to either make changes or celebrate your wins going into the new year! If this spoke to you shoot me a DM and let me know :)

What We Discussed

New for the Business (3:15)

New for the Family (8:10)

Traveled Happened (16:37)

Scheduled Slow Days (21:24)

90. How I Set Boundaries Between Work & Life

Rebecca Rice — Thu, 15 Dec 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

More Resources: Episode 89 | Free Class |

Today's topic is a continuation of the last episode "How to Take Time Off in Your Business". This topic is incredibly valuable. I want to share how I set boundaries between work and life! I do have a free class, that being in the middle of December could help you with. If you look back on your fall season and question... was it great? Was it awkward? Was it uncomfortable? All these things can be answered with a good posing foundation. This class teaches keys to effective family posing so you can say goodbye to awkward and stiff! Click the link and take advantage of that FREE resource! Now on to how to set boundaries between work and life!

Decide What You Want Your Life to Look Like

Determining what your ideal life looks like. So, for me my biggest priority is my family. That comes first. I want to be the best version of myself for them and for myself. In order to do that I needed to set up boundaries that promoted a healthy version of me. What is a realistic amount of time to work on my business and be with my family? I figured out that's about 15 hours a week. That still gives me time to take a nap everyday and fuel my priorities. It's funny when people find out I take a nap literally everyday they are shocked. But I know I'm my best version of myself when I'm fully rested!

Set True Office Hours

Obviously owning a business means you have to be flexible, but setting true office hours is vital! I did this and try to stick to it. That means when office hours are up I'm closing my laptop and not talking about work at the dinner table or bouncing in and out of work life to family/home life. For me I do my best work early in the morning. My office hours are Monday, Tuesday, Thursday from about 8:00am to 12:00pm or 1:00pm. I usually wake up naturally around 6:30 so by the time I'm done working I'm ready for my nap! Why those days? It's built around my kids. They are in school those three days and we homeschool the other two. When you're setting work hours, think about what season of life you're in and what works for your family to set your hours accordingly.

Pro tip: keep your computer in your designated workspace (office). That way you're not tempted to cross the boundary!

Focus Mode

I don't know if you're an Apple user or Android user.. I'm an Apple user. I say this because Apple allows you to choose your focus mode. You can set it up by time of day or even location. You can set focus modes to work, sleep, do not disturb, etc. Depending on the time of day your phone will either notify you or not. You get to choose what notifications your receive when depending on the mode! During my work mode I get notifications from slack, trello, voxer, etc. I also set it up so when people text or call me they see I'm in a do not disturb mode. They can still choose to notify, but that doesn't happen often. When office hours are up my phone gets put into personal mode. This is when all my work notifications are off!

Another amazing aspect of personal mode is my work pages get hidden! So when I look all my work apps are hidden!

No is Ok

This may not sit well with some of you, but you have to allow yourself to say no. I shared how I set boundaries on which days I'm dedicating to sit down and work, but I've also decided to only take calls on certain days. For instance, Thursdays I don't take any zoom calls. Thursday I use to get my checklists done. I say no to Thursdays. No mastermind calls, podcast interviews, etc. It's a non negotiable for me. For you maybe it's setting limits on when you shoot! Sometimes that means saying no to potential bookings, but when you value your boundaries you are blessed in the long run. Most of the time people respect your boundaries because they see what you value! Ask yourself what it's costing you to break those types of boundaries and decide if it's worth it.

I am incredibly passionate about setting boundaries. Why start a business and be your own boss if you can't make them? You're trying to build a life you're proud of and enjoy. So trust me, this will help!

What We Discussed

Decide What You Want Your Life to Look Like (6:03)

Set True Office Hours (7:16)

Focus Mode (9:34)

No is Ok (12:18)

89. How To Take Time Off In Your Business

Rebecca Rice — Thu, 01 Dec 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

More Resources: 3k Mini Sessions Blueprint

Before diving into things today, I also wanted to give you all a gift to help with your photography business! Question: how did your fall season go? If it wasn't exactly what you were hoping for then this is for you. If you've never made $3,000 or more on a single date of minis you need this. I call it my 3k Mini Sessions Blueprint! It has helped so many photographers and it will reassure you that YES, it is possible to run successful minis! Now, that we've taken care of "business" let's talk about how to take time off in your business. Here are some practical things to help you take time off!

Pick a Date

It starts with your calendar. You obviously can't take time off in a busy season, but you should be intentional about having time away from the hustle. In about a week my staff and I will head to the beach at 30A in Florida to plan out our upcoming year. My integrator and I meet first and go over everything in the business - what worked, what didn't, what needs to change, etc. Then my staff joins us for a staff retreat! Once all the work and planning is finished the remaining month of December is time off. Now, we do check in on things to make sure we're serving our customers/clients, but this is a time to refresh and reset before the new year. This couldn't happen if I wasn't intentional in my planning. And it starts with choosing a date and sticking with it!

Make a List and Check it Twice

Let's say for the sake of this episode that you are planning to take a week off. First, take out a piece of paper and write down all that happens day to day so you know what needs to be covered. Don't try thinking through how to make this happen just brain dump. In order for you to be "gone" and people not realize you're out. Don't get overwhelmed, just think of how wonderful it would be to have it all done and truly get time off! Maybe your list includes checking your inbox, responding to clients, social media posts, blogging, etc. If this is too much just keep a running list next to you over the course of the next week to write down what you're doing!

Plan Extra Work

With a list, you're able to see clearly what needs to be finished/prepped. One of my team members, Bonnie, had a baby this fall which meant we were planning months ahead of time. She writes our blogs for Wisp and Willow and we created a list of blogs that needed to get done before her maternity leave. This involved blogging October, November, December AND January because once she came back we didn't want her scrambling. Bonnie was amazing and is enjoying time with her new babe as we speak! So for a week of vacation it's not nearly as drastic. Let's say during your week off you would normally have a blog post go live and a social media post along with it. Those things can be scheduled! Use something like Plann, Later, Planoly, etc.

Auto Responder for Expectations

There are things that can't get scheduled, like emails. I know not everyone is on team auto responder for emails, but imagine if you did step away for a week and didn't tell anyone. That would be difficult and leave your clients/customers with nothing. An auto responder is basically an email template that sets the expectations for what's going on and when people can hear from you. You can set this up for free and if you use Gmail it's really easy! When someone emails you they'll receive an email that says something simple about being out of the office.

For emergencies, like clients who have questions about an upcoming session, etc. we have a cell number that they can TEXT. And yes, we make that a bold font so our client care manager isn't bombarded with phone calls. But I don't encourage this because truly how many photography "emergencies" can there be?

True Rest Requires True Time Off

I know some of you struggle to truly step away from the business and have boundaries. If that's you then delete things like social media from your phone. If you have an email app too, delete it! I'm speaking from experience when I say having time away is only beneficial for your business. It may not be a month like my team, but give yourself space to breathe! Enjoy rest and I guarantee you'll come back ready to tackle what's ahead with new life.

What We Discussed

Pick a Date (6:03

Make a List and Check it Twice (7:16)

Plan Extra Work (9:34)

Auto Responder for Expectations (12:18)

True Rest Requires True Time Off (16:22)

88. Tips On Selling Prints To Your Clients

Rebecca Rice — Thu, 17 Nov 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

More Resources: Free Posing Class

I'm excited to jump into today's topic! It's one I don't talk about much, but a lot of you have asked me. I'm sharing tips on selling prints to your clients. Hopefully this answers things for you and you increase your revenue by selling to your clients! I do have a FREE class for you all about POSING! Most of us are in the thick of sessions right now so this class is timely. I'll be walking through the 6 keys to effective family posing. The best part is you'll be able to apply the contents to your very next session! Ready to have some tips for selling prints to your clients?!

Make Prints Available

I know this may seem like an obvious tip, but you'd be surprised how many photographers are missing out simply because they don't offer it! Most gallery delivery systems have a shopping cart feature where you can set all this up. Basically the system has an auto fulfillment for prints. So, clients can put photos in the cart and order. The orders are placed with the printing lab and delivered white label to your clients so they don't see who you're printing from! So for starters, open up the shopping cart with your pricing, etc.

Educate on Why

This is one of those things that if you don't know, you don't know. We live in a digital age so it's easy for people to just get digitals and that's that. As photographers we should cast vision as to why prints are important! We should paint the picture of the value of prints. There's something special about pulling out an heirloom photo album or having pictures around your home. Having prints gives those in the photo a sense of belonging. However, clients may not think of this off the bat. When you showcase the value of tangible prints your clients are more likely to buy!

Talk About What You Offer

Show what you want to sell. You've got to excite your clients on social media and advertisement for what you're offering - in this case prints! So, if you're wanting to sell wall art then show them wall art on your social platforms. Give them reason to want what you're selling. Another point to think about is to educate them why they shouldn't print them at shutterfly or costco. We know, as photographers, those types of places have terrible quality. You don't get beautiful heirloom pieces from shutterfly. This is why clients should buy prints from you! But, it starts by talking about it in your content.

Pricing Prints

A good rule of thumb to price your prints is to mark up 3x the amount of wholesale. For example, if something was wholesale at $2 then you would mark it up to $6. The reason for this is in the case that you need to replace a print you will still make a profit. If a print gets messed up, which doesn't happen too often, you would need to make it right. By marking up the wholesale you cover those instances without eating up your revenue.

Selling prints doesn't have to feel slimy or forced. It should be conversational! Talk about it on your social platforms, educate your clients as to why and at the very least just make it available in the shopping cart! Let me know if these were helpful tips for selling prints to your clients!

What We Discussed

Make Prints Available (3:00)

Educate on Why (4:33)

Talk About What You Offer (8:26)

Pricing Prints (10:56)

87 - How I Prep The Week of Mini-Sessions

Rebecca Rice — Thu, 20 Oct 2022 06:00:00 -0500

More Resources: Free Minis Class | Client Questionnaire | Email Templates | Dubsado Discount

It just seemed timely to have an episode like this in the midst of Mini-Session season! Here is a glimpse into how I prep the week of Mini-Sessions. Your prep week doesn't have to be frantic or stressful, but before diving in I do have a FREE class that targets the marketing for mini sessions. Be sure you check that out and let it be a help to you this mini season! Ready to learn how I prep the week of mini-sessions?

Prep Your Gear

The very first thing I do is get my gear ready. I charge all my batteries and clear my SD cards. I always bring two batteries on my mini-sessions day. I usually never need the back up, but I don't want to panic if the battery in my camera has an issue! And a good rule of thumb is don't wait to charge the night before. Get them done early in the week then test it out to make sure it's fully charged. I do this because I had a bad experience and for some reason my batteries didn't charge completely and I was trying to charge in between sessions... not fun! I like to shoot on 32 gig SD cards and I bring two for the day as well.

Prep the Google Calendar

I like adding all my clients' sessions into Google calendar. It helps me stay organized and know who is up next. Something I've been doing with that is including their Client Questionnaire in their event! It's genius because in case I forget details about them or their particular session I can quickly open it inside my Google calendar. I use Dubsado which is awesome for this purpose too. Dubsado actually adds sessions into my calendar and I manually add in the Questionnaire afterward.

Client Questionnaire

When it comes to Mini-Sessions you are limited on the amount of time you have with your clients. So, rather than using up precious minutes with questions like what's your name and tell me about yourself I have a Client Questionnaire! This is another 'how I prep the week of Mini-Sessions' tip. Read through all your client questionnaires. In that I ask very intentional things like if they've ever done a mini session. I ask specifics about their family dynamic, if they have any special needs, etc. The goal is to serve them to the best of my ability so having this information beforehand is so valuable! Not sure on what to ask? You can actually purchase my Questionnaire HERE!

Final Info Email

Another thing I do to prep the week of Mini-Sessions is send out my Final Info Email. This gives clients last minute reminders, answers questions about location, etc. I used to send it out manually, but now it's an automated step in my CRM - Dubsado. The purpose is to answer any questions clients might have to avoid the monotonous back and forth communication. They'll know location, where we are meeting, time of session, what to bring to the session and a whole lot more. You can also grab that email template along with others in my Email Templates Bundle.

Last but not Least

I check the weather at the beginning of the week when my session is on the weekends. I will be in contact with clients letting them know I have my eye on the weather and will keep them posted. So if sessions are Sunday night then Friday I will check again. By then the weather channel app usually gives an hourly forecast. So, if it's 80% chance of rain or higher that's when I decide to reschedule. If it's like 50-60% chance I let clients know we're going to make the final decision on Sunday morning. I do not have a rainout date upfront because that just complicates things. When I do reschedule I just change the date and keep everyone's time slots the same. If it doesn't work for someone I then find a new time that works for them.

Lastly, I also scout locations in the week of prep. If it's a new spot I go to check the lighting and surroundings so that I'm not surprised the day of! Remember the goal is to eliminate surprises and stress on the day of!

What We Discussed

Prep Your Gear (3:15)

Prep the Google Calendar (5:59)

Client Questionnaire (7:02)

Final Info Email (9:00)

Last but not Least (10:19)

86. What To Do When Burnout Impacts Your Creativity with Krista Lynch

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 19 Sep 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Connect with Krista Lynch: Instagram | Website | Free Profit Planning Masterclass

I'm excited to have Krista Lynch on the podcast today sharing about what to do when burnout impacts your creativity! She's a wedding and brand photographer but also does business coaching. She has a lot on her plate and knows a thing or two about burnout. Although this topic may not be the most glamorous to talk about, it's something all of us face at some point. So, what do you do when burnout impacts your creativity?

Accepting the Season

It's easy to see it, but accepting it is a whole different thing. Living in a culture where social media constantly reminds us we should be creating more, producing more and not struggling while doing so is tough. The truth is everyone faces seasons of feeling unmotivated and lacking creativity. So understanding it is a normal thing can help you with the next step. Acceptance. Frustrations or that "blah" feeling does not mean you've failed.

Find the Triggers

Where or what has made you have self doubt? What is it in your life that made you feel like you need to over work? Locating triggers can help you set boundaries and avoid going down ugly rabbit trails. Social media can be a big one like we've talked about earlier. But, pausing and making space for rest is actually productive. Work really can wait for tomorrow because the reality is... work will always be there! A common response to burnout is ejecting yourself from everything. So giving yourself space allows for you to get back to a healthy state of mind.

Someone Who Relates

As business owners, expressing this place of burnout to someone who understands the shoes you're in can help a lot! Often we have people in our lives that want to help but hearing "you're doing great" or "you'll be fine" isn't exactly motivating. Finding someone who shares some common ground with you is like finding truth! You can believe what they say. And most of the time they have great tips to get you out of the funk you're currently in!

Releasing the Pressure

Usually we end up creating unrealistic timelines and overwhelm ourselves with work. Here's what to do when burnout impacts your creativity - relieve the pressure! You can't function and produce all these great ideas when you're already tending to so many other things. I created this "parking lot" list that I put my great ideas on. At times the items on this sit for months. When you have the capacity you can pull things from the parking lot, but if it becomes too much just park it!

Brain Mapping

Once you feel like you're back in a space to grow and put your hand to things, write down your goals. From there, break down what needs to take place to accomplish it. Break down goals into the smallest steps possible. By doing this you slowly start building confidence because you're checking things off the list. It also helps us pace ourselves so we don't jump into too much too soon. Start by doing one thing at a time, just one task a day. Regulate yourself and see the momentum begin to build again.

All these will tend to you. So next time you're stuck or overwhelmed you have some tools to know what to do when burnout impacts your creativity!

What We Discussed

Accepting the Season (6:13)

Find the Triggers (8:58)

Someone Who Relates (13:07)

Releasing the Pressure (16:02)

Brain Mapping (21:56)

85. My Photography Client Workflow

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 12 Sep 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

More Resources: Free Posing Class | Dubsado | Shootproof

This is a tricky one for me! If you're a visual learner and want this "drawn" out just let me know! I'm going to be walking you through my photography client workflow. More specifically, the back end of what my clients go through with me for a session! Before getting in too deep I want to remind you of a FREE class I have all about posing. It's called the Keys to Effective Family Posing and inside I unravel elements you need to pose families well! Click the link, learn a ton and head into your next session excited to implement! Now here's my best verbal explanation of my photography client workflow...

Trello Organization

This is one of my top tools I use and it's basically a business management tool. In it I have an entire board for my photography client workflow. Each client gets their own card on the board that has a massive checklist. It includes all the pertinent info for the client (name, email, location, date, time, etc.). Every step of booking, Dubsado workflow, leading up to the session, final payment info, etc! Post processing: editing, uploading, backing up hard drives, etc. When I said everything I meant everything! So that's where I start. Getting all the info and workflow in an organized place.

Dubsado

I use this to send contracts and invoices, additional emails, the questionnaire, the client experience guide and the final info email. So all our clients are housed here because this is where they are served and communicated with. Clients don't see or have any involvement in Trello (that's in house).

Private Editor & Lightroom Classic CC

The next step is sending all our images to our private editor and we use Lightroom classic cc to edit all our images! We put images in Lightroom and once they're ready to be edited and include smart previews. That's how we send them to our editor. Rather than having to send all the raws we send them the Lightroom catalog that has smart previews. This allows our editor to edit the images without having the files. After editing in Lightroom they send it back and we are able to make final tweaks and crops to the images. After all that we export and it's on to the next...

Shootproof

It's finally time for delivery! I use Shootproof to deliver galleries. We also upload our final images to Google drive as a virtual back up. You can never be too safe. We don't keep a back up of raw images, however, images aren't deleted until 2 weeks after the gallery has been delivered.

Was that a lot? Here's a recap: Start with the big checklist in Trello! Next is contracts, forms, invoices in Dubsado. Lastly, deliver the galleries in Shootproof. If you are lost in any way feel free to reach out and ask more about my photography client workflow. And check out the resources mentioned above to help you out!

What We Discussed

Trello Organization (2:59)

Dubsado (6:58)

Private Editor & Lightroom Classic CC (7:33)

Shootproof (8:23)

84. The Top 5 Tools I Use In My Business

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 05 Sep 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

More Resources: Free Posing Class | Dubsado | Shootproof | Flodesk

I'm so ready to pull back the curtain and let you in on the top 5 tools I use in my business. If you've been around a while these may not be a surprise, but it's a great refresher! All of these will be linked so you can use them too. I have discount codes for most and others are free! Now, before digging in I do want to mention a FREE class I know you'll benefit from. It's called "Keys to Effective Family Posing" no more awkward and stiff! If you feel like posing is your weakest link, maybe you're not super confident or clients are a bit awkward and stiff... this class is for YOU! In the class I talk through some of my go to poses, things to look for when posing and just some building blocks to creating a natural/comfortable pose. On to the top 5 tools I use in my business...

Trello

This is a free online business management tool and it's how I keep EVERYTHING in my business organized. It's an alternative to asana and to me it's much more visual. Trello is incredibly flexible and we literally use it for content management, launches, to-dos, etc! It's similar to Pinterest in that it functions in "boards". Within these beautiful boards you can create checklists! As I began adding team members I needed the workflows and processes to live somewhere other than in my head. (If you've never written out your workflows/processes is vital for future or current outsourcing!)

Dubsado

We use this as our client relationship management tool. It's our CRM and it is houses our contracts, invoices, any communication between us and the client and workflows! I literally don't know where I would be without it. I've tried plenty of CRMs and this one has the best automations in my opinion. If it weren't for this platform I would lose track of clients which is not ok! I do have a discount for Dubsado that you can access HERE!

Shootproof

Our gallery delivery system here is wonderful. It's user friendly, helps assist our clients and is so pretty! You know I am a big believer in upselling and this platform allows us to do it well! I do have an affiliate link, which sadly doesn't give you a discount. But it does give me a small kickback which just helps with running a business and making this podcast possible! You can start using Shootproof at a small rate and increase as you need to with their packages.

Google Calendars

I am a huge fan of Google calendars and to be honest we probably use WAY too many! I separate promotional campaigns like Christmas in July because it just makes it easy visually. It also integrates beautifully with Dubsado, so when I book a client with Dubsado I have it synced with Google calendars so it automatically adds it! I use it with my associate team which consists of 18 photographers and each of them uses it for multiple things!

Flodesk

This is our email marketing system and it's literally the Canva of email platforms. It's so easy to use and absolutely beautiful! I've used a few and this one just takes the cake. Flodesk has templates, easy drag and drop options and more. I do have a discount code for this one you can grab HERE. What's the difference between emails sent in Flodesk vs. Dubsado... I say Flodesk is best for mass emails whereas Dubsado is the one on one communication for clients. That way I can keep track of specific convos. I'm a huge believer in email marketing and have another podcast on why Flodesk is worth getting, you can listen HERE!

I hope hearing the top 5 tools I use in my business was helpful for you. There's obviously more I use, but these are my faves! Reach out if you have any questions or suggestions!

What We Discussed

Trello (2:49)

Dubsado (6:20)

Shootproof (7:22)

Google Calendars (8:25)

Flodesk (11:25)

83. How To Prep Your Family For A Busy Fall Season

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 29 Aug 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

More Resources: Free Minis Class

Last week we talked about prepping your business, but today we're going after how to prep your family for a busy season! I also have a Free Minis Class and will help you so much before diving head first into busy season. You should be booking minis right now so if you're not you need this class! Now, let's talk about prepping our families. For me family is one of the most important aspects of my life. When I look back I did my family a disservice when it came to busy season. Let's learn how to succeed in business while protecting our families!

Talk About Family Rhythms

Start having conversations now about the upcoming season. Understanding the world doesn't revolve around your sessions and your spouse or kids also have agendas they want to accomplish is vital. I like to talk about it like a rhythm rather than a routine. Routines are usually concrete, but a rhythm (much like music) gives you space to speed up and slow down. In busy season I typically shoot on weekends, but summer I am able to be home with kids, etc. Talking about what's coming now helps give my spouse understanding. Remember he is not a photographer and doesn't know the schedule! In these convos we can talk through daily schedules and what boundaries will look like. Find what works for your family and prepare your family for a busy season! It won't last forever.

Plan Out Dates

I open up my photography schedule to my spouse and show him what I want to do. Then he has space to veto something and have a say. We want to plan around birthdays and other events. This way I'm not going into the next month with a plan to shoot every weekend when we have a family birthday or something else going on.

Hire Childcare if Possible

I know hiring childcare may not be feasible for your family. But if it is, I highly suggest doing it! Even if it's just 1-2 days a week. You could even price it out and add it into the overall cost of your sessions. Knowing your kids are being taken care of will give you peace of mind. You will be able to give yourself 100% to the hustle without feeling torn. Obviously you need to do what works, but trust me, it's worth it if you can!

Understanding Hustle Season

What is this going to look like and when is it going to end? This is what needs to be communicated to your family. When you set the expectation there aren't surprises! Literally pull out a calendar and circle a date that determines the END of your hustle season. We have a rule in our business that there are NO sessions after the first week of December. When you have an end in sight you can endure the craziness! In my business, we take the entire month of December is off. My husband knows after that first week, life is "back to normal". Having an end date gives you a goal to push through. And hold the line! Do not let yourself go beyond that point. Living in a never ending hustle is not healthy and your family deserves your time/energy.

Preparing your business is important, but I would say knowing how to prep your family for busy season takes priority! Don't forget to sign up for the Free Class and get yourself ready for what's ahead!

What We Discussed

Talk About Family Rhythms (3:31)

Plan Out Dates (7:51)

Hire Childcare if Possible (9:09)

Understanding Hustle Season (10:09)

82. How To Prep Your Business For A Busy Fall Season

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 22 Aug 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

More Resources: Free Minis Class | Client Experience Guide | Email Templates

How many of you are ready for Fall?! I have a Free Minis Class on mini sessions and right now is the best time to do it! Especially if you're wanting to have a successful mini season. There are no catches or gimmicks, just a great class filled with tons of info! Today I'm talking all about how to prep your business for a busy fall season. I've done this well and not so well! Here are some practical things that will make a huge difference. Instead of being burnt out and exhausted you can look back and be proud of what all took place. So here are your practical applications on how to prep your business for a busy fall season...

Set up Your CRM Workflows and Automations

This is STEP 1! Now, regardless of what you're using it should do the work for you. I love Dubsado, but maybe you use Honeybook, etc. Rather than having to remember to send contracts, invoices and forms you can have them automated! So all the emails that go out, the client experience guide, the whole sequence can be triggered and serve our clients without me having to think about it!

Refresh Your Client Experience

Write down all the steps you have in place to serve your clients. What emails are you sending them, do you have style guides, are you answering last minute questions. Maybe you've been wanting to give a Client Experience Guide, which is like my version of a style guide, now is the time to do it! Don't wait for the busy season to fix or add what you're doing. And if you want to start sending one, but you're not sure where to start you can grab mine in my shop. It's a Canva template that's pre-written so you can add photos and it's done! Maybe you need to add a Final Info Email to answer those questions. I've got Email Templates as well to make things easy for you!

Schedule Rest

Blank space is not bad space! It's needed. I remember being just miserable early on, especially when I had little babies! I became intentional about when I would shoot. So, I chose either Saturday or Sunday but not both. It's important to give time to rest, protect your mental health and honor your family. When I finished that season I can remember feeling so giddy and excited that I did it and did it well! So, mark out some boundaries and remember your time matters - protect it!

Outsource and Train

If you're new to outsourcing I suggest starting with an editor. Don't wait for busy season to find them. Get to know an editor now to make sure your style is honed in on. When you try to book an editor in the midst of busy season they most likely will be busy themselves! And if you have an editor and are trying to add an online assistant trust me, that takes time. Training is not just an overnight process and you'll need to share your brain to communicate what's expected or needed.

I've got more in store for you next week on how to prep your business for busy fall season, but for now you can check out some other blogs to help you along the way!

What We Discussed

Set up Your CRM Workflows and Automations (3:55)

Refresh Your Client Experience (6:23)

Schedule Rest (8:10)

Outsource and Train (11:17)

81. Finding Rhythms That Serve Your Family Best with Ashley Spriggs

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 15 Aug 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

Connect with Ashley Spriggs: Website | Instagram

I'm pleased to have Ashley Spriggs on with me today! She is a wife, mom to 3 little ones and owner of Pivot Media! We're excited to talk about finding rhythms that serve your family best. This is crucial especially when it comes to thriving in both "worlds" so to speak. Today is all about the rhythm not the routine! Rhythm gives you movement and allow flexibility vs. being boxed into a routine. Let's dive into finding rhythms that serve your family best!

Priorities & Values

Sitting down with your spouse and actually talking through what is valued most is a must. You can't come with your own expectations and force them on everyone else. Talk through what you value! Afterward prioritize from greatest to least. It's interesting because within our values we all have unique rhythms that allow us to accomplish them. And learning how your family functions - whether they are morning people, work around naps or like to have a quiet space all plays into your family rhythm.

Finding a New Rhythm in New Seasons

Looking at actual seasons of life and asking questions: what worked in the last season? What didn't work? What do we value moving forward? Then the implementation needs to be practiced for a few weeks. Find what works! Another thing is don't be afraid to ask questions that challenge where you are and stay flexible! Being aware of what is needed in today will help give your longevity to endure tough seasons. Seasons of transition are inevitable and often the hardest. You almost have to mesh an old rhythm with a new one which is why flexibility will save you. Rhythm without flexibility is actually routine!

Write Out a Flow

Sit down and put together 5 potential rhythms that work for the week. And don't do Monday through Sunday, utilize Monday through Friday and allow the weekends to fuel your family. If Monday's rhythm works then build on it Tuesday. If Monday's rhythm caused stress and anxiety, it's ok! Tomorrow is a new day. Sometimes it's trial and error until you see what fits. And don't forget finding rhythms that serve your family best takes time. It requires flexibility and practice. Learning to ebb and flow with the season your kids are in, the new natural seasons like school starting and knowing people's preferences will help tremendously!

Tune in to hear more from this conversation. It's jam packed with relatable content and will help you wherever you are in this season!

What We Discussed

Priorities & Values (8:28)

Finding a New Rhythm in New Seasons (16:53)

Write Out a Flow (35:40)

80. The Real Reason Behind the "We Can't Afford You" Response with Annemie Tonken

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 08 Aug 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

Resources Mentioned: The Ultimate Guide to Mastering Manual Mode

Connect with Annemei Tonkin: Website | Facebook | Instagram | Overcoming Price Objections | Simple Sales System Masterclass

I'm thrilled to have special guest Annemei Tonkin from the "This Can't Be That Hard" podcast! We're having a conversation around the response you may have gotten from clients "We can't afford you"! No one likes hearing that and it's a very hard response. Rejection in general is challenging, but let's dive into the reality behind "we can't afford you"...

The Offer is too Complicated or too Simple

Sometimes giving our clients too many choices overcomplicates the "deal". Options aren't wrong, but they can be overwhelming! If you offer different types of sessions, have add on packages and give them too much to choose from they may back out because they don't know what to do. Less is more, right? You can give them more customization later rather than "brain dumping" on them at the beginning! On the other hand, you do need to give them something to work with. One size doesn't fit all. If you're struggling to book you may want to examine if you are building flexibility in what you offer.

They Don't See the Value

The reality is "we can't afford you" isn't always true. If clients don't see the value you have then they aren't willing to move forward because it's not worth it to them. It's important to look at your forward facing material like website, socials and branding. Maybe your messaging or how professional you come across. Does it line up with your pricing? If you don't value yourself others won't either. Just be aware of your presentation across the board and believe that what they purchase is worth it!

Connection

The number one way someone will hire you is to make clients feel loyal to you. How do you do that? Have a real conversation. Respond to their questions or concerns and be relational! I know not everyone wants to get on the phone, but maybe you could send a short video. Rather than just sending an email a great idea is to put a personal touch on it. Marco polo, vox or voice memo are some options. It can be as simple as sending a DM because it's a place they are already comfortable and it's not a flat email template!

You Can Deliver

At some point in the process of booking and someone "backs out" it's possible it's because you haven't delivered somewhere. Maybe they just needed more "proof". This is where testimonials, social proof or videos where they see an answer to what they're nervous about! If you're new and don't have that you can at least give them a plan of action. Let them know after they've inquired what's coming next. This creates a safety and stability for clients in the process!

They Actually Can't Afford You

The truth of the matter is photography is not a necessity. It's a luxury. If people can't afford you it's not your fault. You need to have a plan in place for when this response is factual. I've seen too many people crumble and give away sessions when they should be charging. You can give them some names of other photographers or depending on the season of life they are in they may just be in a financial bind now. But in the future they would be an ideal client... That's when you make the choice to draw them in and maybe offer a payment plan. Another option is like a back pocket offer. maybe schedule a mini later on and book a spot early!

There's so much more in the podcast, be sure to give it a listen and check out Annemei Tonkin! If you hear "we can't afford you" it's not the end of the world, it's an opportunity to troubleshoot and pivot.

What We Discussed

The Offer is too Complicated or too Simple (5:43)

They Don't See the Value (12:23)

Connection (17:05)

You Can Deliver (23:12)

They Actually Can't Afford You (28:01)

79. What I Would Do If I Was Starting My Business In 2022

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 01 Aug 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

Resources Mentioned: 6 Steps to Double Your Revenue | Free Email Marketing Guide | Flodesk Discount | Portrait Contract Template | Dubsado | Shootproof | CODB Tutorial

Today's topic is an interesting one! I'm talking about what I would do if I was starting my business in 2022! It's going to be a good one, but I do have this free class to help you get started to have a complete marketing strategy! It's called the "6 Steps to Double your Revenue". It helps you build your photography business so you can be on your way to doubling your revenue this year. So, here's what I would do first if I was starting my business in 2022...

Start Email Marketing Early

Email marketing is the easiest way to book photo sessions from your warmest clients. They know you, trust you and want more of what you have! You want to start an email list of these clients. I call them the VIP clients. This way you market to them first without having to go to the public. That definitely takes time, but that's why you need to start NOW! An email list is something you own so you have control unlike social media platforms where things are constantly changing. I use Flodesk as a platform and have loved it. Flodesk is easy to use, it's beautiful and I've got a FREE guide to grow your email list from 0 to 100! You can use my code HERE to get 50% off for life and get that list going!

Get Legit

Before you start take paying clients you need to register your business as either an LLC or Sole Proprietor. This sets you up to be legit moving forward. Even if you're not making much, this is important! The next thing to get legit is by getting a contract in place. And not just any contract, but one a lawyer has looked at or approved. Regardless of the type of session, you need one in place to protect both you and your clients. I have a contract that's been lawyer approved, it's customizable and it's the same one I use for all my sessions! You can grab that HERE. Lastly, you want to get a good CRM in place. It allows you to automate contracts and invoices. Everything is done online and my fave is Dubsado. More info in the podcast, so give it a listen!

Start Charging Profitably

There's a myth out there that says if you are newer you have to charge a lot less than established photographers. Now obviously if your skill is not up to par you shouldn't be charging $1000 per session. But you still need to make a profit by charging enough to keep the doors open for your business. You can find out what that price needs to be by doing a Cost of Doing Business or CODB. Check out THIS tutorial to find out yours!

Invest in Education before Gear

I did this backward when I first started. It set me back at least a year. I could have launched faster and gone farther in my business early on had I invested in education first! As far as gear goes, get together a full frame body, one solid lens and a cheap flash and you're good to go.

Find Community

Especially in the photography industry you should find yourself to find a good community. I know it seems like there are only pockets of people in photography that are helpful, encouraging and willing to share. But we were not created to do this alone. I have a Facebook community called "Mom-Photography 101" and they are incredible! We strongly believe in community over competition so check that out and join us! This is what I'd do if I was starting my business in 2022 and hopefully it helps you!

What We Discussed

Start Email Marketing Early (2:05)

Get Legit (4:42)

Start Charging Profitably (7:43)

Invest in Education before Gear (9:44)

Find Community (11:30)

78. Why I Still Blog Every Week

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 25 Jul 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

Resources Mentioned: Free Email Marketing Guide | Blogging and SEO Mini Course

Blogging is honestly one of my FAVORITE things, specifically for long-term marketing. Now I will say I didn't enjoy this in the beginning because it's for the long term play. I'll be sharing why I still blog every week in this episode. But, before I do, I wanted to give you this new, completely free, Email Marketing Guide. If you want to see your subscriber list go from 0 to 100 then be sure to grab it. This step by step guide will walk through exactly what to do to see growth in your subscriber list! So, when it comes to blogging let me say: blogging is not dead!

Getting Found on Google

Blogging is HUGE when it comes to SEO (search engine optimization). This is important because although social media is grabbing attention it's also based off of algorithms. That means you may or may not get found. But, I use a platform called Wordpress that has a free plugin called Yoast SEO. So, it gives me a checklist of things to do in order to optimize my blog! This is why I still blog every week. I am increasing my SEO which gives me the ability to be found on google.

The Shelf Life

A blog's "shelf life" is YEARS. I still get hits on blogs I wrote years ago which connects them to my site, etc. You can't really say the same for social media. People are not seeing posts you made 1, 2 or 3 years ago. The beauty of google is they don't just store blogs in the posts section, but also images. I've had people reach out to me because they found an image of a session I blogged about and now they are a new client!

Easy to Repurpose

Blog content is so easy to repurpose. For instance, if I write a blog on a family session I did I can reuse the content for social media posts or, one of my favorites, Pinterest! Pinterest is great for visuals like photography. I use tailwind and to automate my Pinterest and I do it once a month. We load up the queue which does take a few hours, but then Pinterest is sending out pins automatically for me for the next month! That is my #2 resource for driving people to my website. My #1 resource is definitely YouTube.

An Extended Portfolio

Another reason why I still blog every week is because it acts as a portfolio. This is super helpful when you have someone asking to see examples of specific sessions. Sure your Facebook and Instagram might seem like they cover that in marketing, but when you have blogs you can easily search and send them a link! Maybe they're wanting to see images from a specific location. You can have blog posts that act as location spotlights. Blogging really is such a resource for your future clients.

Answer FAQs

Pay attention to questions that people ask leading up to their sessions. For example, "Can I bring my dog to my session?" You can literally have an entire blog post about pets and policies. By creating blog content that answers common questions or gives tips you can send these to clients! I can't tell you how much I recommend blogging. These were just a few reasons why I still blog every week. And maybe the thought of every week is overwhelming to you, then start with once a month.

Blogging and SEO Mini Course

Blogging is such a powerful way to get found on Google, to be able to create content to share on your social media, to share with your email list and serve your clients well. Have you been wondering what to write? How to create a blog? How to optimize for SEO? I created a course called Blogging and SEO Mini Course that answers ALL the questions! It gives you 52 blog ideas, specific FAQs you could start with, blogging templates and an SEO checklist. So it walks you through all the pieces to put together a blog optimized so you get found on Google easier. There are screenshares inside so you can see how to tackle it all. If I can fall in love with blogging anyone can, trust me!

What We Discussed

Getting Found on Google (2:30)

The Shelf Life (3:47)

Easy to Repurpose (5:26)

An Extended Portfolio (7:03)

Answer FAQs (8:52)

Blogging and SEO Mini Course (10:40)

77. My Favorite Email Marketing Platform

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 18 Jul 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

Resources Mentioned: Free Email Marketing Guide | Email Marketing Mini Course | 50% Off Flodesk!

Today we're talking all about my favorite email marketing platform! Before breaking down all the info I wanted to give you something that goes hand in hand with this topic. I have a free guide to help you dive deep into email marketing. This is designed to grow your email list from 0 to 100 subscribers. So, if you are looking to get your first 100 subscribers, this download is for you! Now onto my favorite email marketing platform... Flodesk! You can try it out for 50% off using this code!

The Price

I have used so many different platforms and landed on Flodesk for a reason. I've done mailchimp, mad mimi, ConvertKit, but in the end Flodesk became the winner! The founders are so sweet and truly listen to their customer feedback. What makes Flodesk unique is their price. Every month you pay the same amount regardless of how many subscribers you obtain. This is different from other platforms because you don't get penalized for growing your email list!

The Design

I call Flodesk the Canva of email systems. Flodesk is so user friendly and absolutely beautiful! Maybe it has changed since I used it, but ConvertKit required me to do coding in order to add a simple button in my emails. Flodesk makes it simple and easy with a drag and drop design. Choosing layouts, dropping in images and having the choice of pretty fonts made it easy to design around my brand! We are talking about marketing. If your emails don't match your brand then your marketing isn't where it could be.

The Features: Segments

Now it may have fewer bells and whistles compared to ConvertKit, but it has what you need. Sometimes too many features can be overwhelming! A few of the features that Flodesk has is what they call segments. It allows you to separate your subscribers into groups of people. For instance, you can separate your list into demographics like young families, wedding, seniors, etc. This allows you to send specific emails to these different groups. Now you won't be losing subscribers because they aren't getting emails that don't apply to them. I also use segments with my associate team. I can set up segments for Dallas clients then Richmond clients or Nashville clients, etc.

The Features: Opt In Forms

I love that I can create beautiful and easy opt in forms. An opt in form collects basic info. So, someone fills out their first and last name along with their email and they automatically get added to my email list. You can set this feature to add them to a specific segment too! Flodesk forms have the ability to be embedded into your website or as a pop up and voila you grow your email list.

The Features: Workflow Automations

This feature helps serve your clients well. You can create these automations that when someone enters a segment it then triggers a series of emails to go out. For instance, you can have a 3 day welcome sequence. If someone joins your email list from a pop up they will receive an automated email welcoming them to your business. Then the next day an email automatically goes out introducing who you are and how you got started. Then the last day they can receive an opportunity to book with you or inquire for more session info! These automations save you so much time in the long run! I created a mini course called Email Marketing because taking all this in can seem like a lot. It walks you through the set up, what kind of emails to send out and how to have these workflows in place. You can check out that course HERE!

Email marketing is not dead. My associate team started an email list this year and grew it from ground level. They ended up booking 40 Christmas minis in 2 days from email marketing! So, try Flodesk. It's my favorite email marketing platform for a reason.

76. PMC Q&A | Answering Questions About My Signature Program

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 11 Jul 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

Resources Mentioned: Profitable Minis 2.0 | Intro to Mini Sessions

Let's get into Profitable Minis 2.0! If you're listening live the course is OPEN and 50% off! Maybe you're wanting to level up your mini sessions game and need to learn how to make them profitable. Today I'm answering questions about my signature program, so here we go!

Intro to Minis vs. PMC 2.0

Basically Intro to Minis began as the start to minis. It's about 3 hours of content and was launched as a basic foundation for mini sessions. It covers things like structuring your minis and shooting workflow, but it is very different from PMC 2.0. I realized after doing Intro to Minis that there was SO much more information I wanted to put in. So, PMC 2.0 has everything Intro to Minis has but a lot more! The course is a one stop course including 15 hours of content and preparing you start to finish for successful mini sessions. Plus it has plenty of items from the shop like templates, other mini courses, etc. included.

What About Marketing?

Profitable Minis 2.0 takes a deep dive into marketing. That's one of the major differences between minis booking out or not. There are complete modules set aside solely for marketing and multiple types! Inside this course you'll have screen shares to see how to set up campaigns and tie all your marketing together. That's the beauty of marketing, once you learn how to set it up, it doest the work for you!

Where Should I Start?

I'm often asked, which course is a better starting place: Intro to Minis or PMC 2.0? I suggest PMC 2.0 for those of you that are more advanced in your photography. Intro to Minis is better for beginner photographers (especially those with a more restrictive budget). If you can afford to do PMC 2.0 I still would highly suggest this course. There are payment plan options to help, so if you can swing it I would do PMC 2.0!

What Is Ultimate PMC 2.0?

Here's the thing, I don't do the best job letting people know about this option. Ultimate PMC 2.0 is the same course, but it includes a 1 on 1 call with me! So, if you're the kind of person that likes more of a "hands on" approach or you need some accountability for implementing this is a great option! Maybe you're looking for individualized feedback and guidance on how to make mini sessions work for your specific business then that's the goal for Ultimate PMC2.0. It's one thing to watch a course, but sometimes you need eyes in on what you're doing. You want someone to look at your work and say "make this tweak, adjust this here" and give you specified advice. This gives you that ability!

Already Have Intro to Minis?

Some of you already have Intro to Minis and either want PMC 2.0 or wish you had that instead. I've actually got an upgrade payment option. This way you can get in, but won't feel stressed about the budget. Again, I wanted to make this attainable for anyone so if budget is holding you back there are some options for you! If you want to upgrade just reach out to my team hello@rebeccaricephoto.com!

What Is the Success Guarantee?

I believe in this course so much I wanted to give you some security since you've not taken it. Basically the guarantee says if you don't make your investment back (the money invested into the course) after your first set of major minis you can be refunded! I've just seen this time and time again how students invest in the course and make more than they've invested back. So I am confident that once you've applied all that the course offers you will be profitable. Don't miss that part though, you do need to apply ALL that the course instructs. Which makes sense right? PMC 2.0 will walk and educate you through all you need for successful mini sessions, but you've got to apply it!

If you have more questions feel free to DM me! I love answering questions about my signature program and want you to be successful!

What We Discussed

Intro to Minis vs. PMC 2.0 (2:24)

What About Marketing (4:23)

Where Should I Start (5:33)

What Is Ultimate PMC 2.0 (6:52)

Already Have Intro to Minis? (8:38)

What Is the Success Guarantee? (9:21)

75. Pros & Cons of Themed Mini-Sessions

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 04 Jul 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

Resources Mentioned: Free Minis Class

There is a time and place for themed minis. Today we'll be talking through the pros and cons to themed mini sessions! But, before we get into it I want you to know I'm hosting a LIVE free class all about MINI SESSIONS! I'll be sharing secrets I use and tips for fully booked minis. Especially with Fall minis literally around the corner it's the right time for you to start prepping! Choose the time that works best for you and join me live (I'll have a Q&A at the end), but if you can't make it live be sure to register for a replay! Now, on to the pros and cons of themed mini sessions...

Pro: Perfect for Seasons

Themed mini sessions are ideal for those seasonal things like Christmas or Easter. My team does Red Truck Minis and they are such a hit! This is when everyone wants to do nostalgic set ups like Christmas pajama minis, Tree Farm minis or Easter minis. I do a fun picnic mini setup in the Spring and people love it!

Pro: Pinterest Worthy

They typically are like the "Pinterest worthy" shots that everyone is looking for. Here's the thing: if you're going to do a theme you want to go all out! Choose something that will grab people's attention. Most of the time when you have a setup that is elaborate and Pinterest worthy people will book. They just have to have that robust flower truck for Spring or that fireplace Christmas setup.

Con: $$$ Expenses

A lot of those elaborately themed minis are expensive. Renting all the things or purchasing the right furniture can add up quickly. This can eat into your profit before you know it. So, you have to be prepared to factor that into your cost. Be sure you increase the price of your mini sessions to cover the cost!

Con: Super Specialized

Sometimes when you're too specific you miss your audience. A lot of times people want something more generic. For instance, in the Fall I don't do an "autumn themed" setup. I've found that most clients just want updated family photos for cards or frames around the house. Which means they don't necessarily want a specific Fall theme. When nature provides something beautiful enough like colorful leaves, blue bonnets or wildflowers don't add to it! Save your themes for more seasonal or holiday shoots. Back to school is a great themed idea that's not necessarily a holiday!

Think through pros and cons of themed mini sessions before diving in and you'll save yourself time and money!

What We Discussed

Pro: Perfect for Seasons (3;11)

Pro: Pinterest Worthy (4:58)

Con: $$$ Expenses (6:57)

Con: Super Specialized (7:27)

74. A Look Back at My Very First Mini-Sessions (& What I Learned)

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 27 Jun 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

Resources Mentioned: Free Minis Class | CODB Tutorial | Email Templates | Client Experience Guide

Ready to take a stroll down memory lane? Let's take a look back at my very first mini sessions and what I learned! Before that I've got this free class to walk you through all things mini sessions. It's a perfect time with Fall minis just ahead and the best part is it's free! You can invest into yourself and business by setting time aside and taking this class. I know it's June, but it really is time to start preparing for marketing Fall minis. This is why I want to walk you through my very first mini sessions.

How It Got Started

I saw a post on Facebook from someone looking for a photographer to do live bunny Easter minis. So, I responded on a whim and said I would do it! I literally decided I'll find a bunny and do sets of minis and priced them at $125. That number was pulled out of thin air and I don't suggest doing that! You need to do a CODB (cost of doing business) and if you don't know how check out THIS YouTube tutorial. I did 4 hours of minis with a lunch break and it was way too much. Each set was 15 minutes and I learned I prefer not to do such a long timeframe. You have to find what works for you!

Have An Assistant

The location we were shooting was quite a distant away from where clients showed up. I had my assistant escort them back and forth so I could effectively do sessions back to back. You can find out how to shoot back to back by taking that free class mentioned above! Now, you don't need an assistant, but it is so worth it. I pay them an hourly rate and often used people I know personally. They don't have to be a photographer either!

Communication Is Key

I've experienced poor communication and knew if I was going to start a business or do this part time I wanted communication to be bliss. I discovered how important it is and what an impact it makes on a client experience. This is where my Final Info Email comes into play. Inside the email includes information like specific directions to our location, parking instructions, what to expect when they arrive and the fact that I shoot sessions back to back. This way they know they can't be late! The wording states that if they are late they forfeit their time and they will not be refunded. It goes out one week before the session and has several last minute reminders. You can find it in my Email Templates in the shop!

Client Experience Guide

I send out my Client Experience Guide to prepare clients as best as possible. This all goes into communication and allows clients to have a handle on their session. They come dressed well and with bribes to accommodate kiddos! My clients rave about my communication because I hold it as high priority. I'm telling you start preparing for mini session season so you can succeed! I use my very first mini sessions to learn and grow so I encourage you to do the same with yours!

What We Discussed

How it Got Started (2:33)

Have An Assistant (7:17)

Communication Is Key (9:02)

Client Experience Guide (10:39)

73. Christmas In July - When To Start Preparing For Christmas Minis

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 20 Jun 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

Resources Mentioned: Free Marketing Class | Portrait Contract Template | Client Questionnaire | Client Experience Guide | Flodesk | Dubsado | Honeybook | Session | Mini Sessions Playbook

I'm diving into my favorite topic: Mini Sessions! More specifically, I'll be talking about Christmas in July and when to start preparing for Christmas minis! I do have a FREE class to help you market your minis. So jump in and get all the free info/resources on how to grow your photography business with mini sessions! Ready to unfold what exactly is Christmas in July, how this campaign works and how you can implement it in your photography business? Let's go!

Christmas in July Campaign

Starting July 1st we open up booking Christmas minis with one of our biggest themes: Red Truck Minis. These are not shot in July, they're shot in October. But, we fully book our dates with this campaign in about 2 days every year! The way we open this or start promoting is to our email list first. We give our email list 24 hours, maybe 48 and then we move to Facebook. If needed we promote these to our Facebook groups and if then do Facebook ads. Typically, because we've done this a while now, we book with our email list alone.

How to Prep

Start now! Choose date to do indoor studio, pajama, pictures with Santa or tree farm minis. You need to set dates and reserve rentals. The next step would be to prep your emails. Don't be worried about sending too many. We've increased the amount of communication when it comes to marketing. Typically we email five days in a row and trust me, it's not too much! Now, you may have some unsubscribe, but the people supporting you appreciate the fact that you are serving them well. Obviously if you book out in the first day or two you don't need to send the rest of your emails. So get them ready now so they are scheduled and ready by July 1st. I use Flodesk for a number of reasons and you can get 50% off by using this link! I've used other email systems, but Flodesk takes the cake.

Next Step Prep

After emails are ready to go it's time to look at your CRM, automations and workflow. My preferred CRM is Dubsado. In my opinion, the automations are unmatched! A lot of people use Session or Honeybook. And I have discounts for all of these. So what you need to do is prep the automations within the workflow. We have automations for those that book. They get added to an automation that sends them emails leading up to their session. It sends their Contract, invoice, Client Questionnaire and Client Guide. The purpose of the Questionnaire is to get to know our clients before the session. Then the Guide helps answer questions, tips for getting kids to cooperate, styling for the family, etc. All proving to be an excellent client experience in the end!

Need a Timeline?

If that all seems overwhelming to you or you get flustered trying to keep track of what you need to do when, I've got something! I created a Mini Sessions Playbook that literally does the thinking for you. It starts at about 9 weeks out from your mini session date and helps you stay on track!

I hope this encourages you to try a Christmas in July campaign! I've got plenty of resources to help you plan, market and give your clients the best experience possible!

What We Discussed

Christmas in July Campaign (1:44)

How to Prep (5:29)

Next Step Prep (9:21)

Need a Timeline? (11:29)

72. Should You Add Associate Shooters?

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 13 Jun 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

Resources Mentioned: Keys to Effective Family Posing | Episode 45 | FB Ad Mini Course

Have you been wondering if you should add associate shooters to your team?! It's something I've navigated through for the past year and a half so I'm thrilled to be talking about it today! I do have a free posing class that focuses on families. It's called "Keys to Effective Family Posing". I've had tremendous feedback from those that have taken already. My heart is full hearing back from you all, so be sure to jump in this free class and learn helpful tools for all things posing! Now, are we ready to dive into the big question - Should you add associate shooters?!

What is an Associate Photographer?

Most of the time an associate photographer is a contract photographer that works for you. So they essentially photograph sessions for you. Once the session is finished they give you all the raw images for you to edit, deliver, etc. You handle all the marketing, the booking and the client communication. One of my favorite perks is that you multiply yourself in a way. You can be in two places at once and get more done! I got to a place where I was fully booked but had more inquiries. Having associate photographers allows me to serve more people and in more places!

Scale Back Without a Financial Hit

Having a team allows you to continue taking on clients, without using up all your time. You're able to continue bringing in revenue without forfeiting family time or every weekend, etc. Maybe you want to pivot. This may be a season where you want to shift your focus. You might want to adjust your full time job. I've had students that love being photographers, but pivot into becoming social media managers or full time editors. I personally made a transition into education. Adding an associate team allowed me to put some major focus on creating education without worrying about enduring a financial hit.

New Market - New Price Point

Having an associate team allows you to have multiple price points. I know I shoot in a luxury price point. So for someone to want to book with me, but maybe it's not in their budget my associate team is a great solution! Clients that want to book with you don't have to be turned away due to price. Now you can suggest one of your associates because you're still handling the edit and delivery. Clients still get to work with you, but you don't have to limit yourself to one market!

Facebook Ad Leads!

When I launched my associate team they had zero client base. So, we started them off with Facebook ads and grew to six figures last year! It was incredible and entirely built on Facebook ads. Now if using Facebook ads scare you, don't shy away! You just need a little encouragement and maybe educating on this topic. I have a FB Ad Mini Course that walks you through using Facebook ads start to finish! The proof that it works is in my associate team. The marketing gets done for you and it truly is a lead generating team!

Signs You're Ready

Let me just preface: you don't have to start with multiple associates! You can start with just one and grow from there. One sign you may be ready is that you've solidified your style. Your editing and shooting are consistent. It's hard for associates to match your style when it's not clear. And for marketing purposes alone you want to showcase consistency to your business. Now, I will note we are reminding our associates often to shoot in my style (light and airy). An edit can only go so far, so the photographer has to do their part as well! Another sign is if you're fully booked. This varies from one to another, but the goal is not to turn people away! If you aren't fully booked most likely your associate team won't be either.

One on One Mentoring

Many have asked if I have a course for setting up a successful associate team and currently I do not. I do however, do one on one mentoring to talk about the back end or communication, etc. I help you set up marketing and logistics of where to find associates. If that interests you just send my team an email at hello@rebeccaricephoto.com and ask about a one on one call with me! I'd love to help you get started and answer questions. I also suggest listening to Episode 45 of my podcast. This is where I fist started talking about associates and should you add associate shooters to your team.

What We Discussed

What is an Associate Photographer (3:06)

Scale Back Without a Financial Hit (4:24)

New Market - New Price Point (5:40)

Facebook Ad Leads! (6:59)

Signs You're Ready (8:44)

One on One Mentoring (14:48)

71. Pricing Q&A - You Asked, I'm Answering

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 06 Jun 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

Resources Mentioned: $3k Mini Sessions Blueprint | Episode 67 | My Instagram | Dubsado Workflow

Pricing seems to be a question that always comes up! Last month we did a pricing episode and today we're doing a pricing Q&A. Especially as we head toward our fall season many of you are looking at your pricing structures. Something else that would be helpful is my $3k Mini Sessions Blueprint! This guide that walks you through making your first $3000.00 on a single date of minis. If you've never done that and want to know how, grab that guide and watch this fall season coming up be one of your most successful! Now let's dive into the pricing Q&A...

Do You Charge the Full Amount Upfront?

I always do a 50% non-refundable retainer at the time of booking then the rest is due before the session. I use that language in the contract that way it truly is non refundable! By splitting up the price, it helps with the sticker shock. Knowing they don't have to make a full payment right away helps clients a lot. I never want the price to deter clients so by giving them the ability to pay part now and the rest later makes a big difference! The reality is people cancel so I highly suggest taking a retainer.

What Do You Charge for Headshots?

I get this question often! Often people ask about what to charge for groups too, like staff headshots. I choose to charge by the person rather than by the amount of time. Most often these are used for advertisement, basically a "branding" photo. So the cost for 2 photos are $200. I know that seems like a lot, but if it's for a business the corporation happily pays that. Obviously if they have a lot of employees (100 or more) then you could do a bulk price, but never hourly!

Mini Session Price that Includes All Photos

So most of you know the way I structure minis includes upselling. So the mini session includes 5 images and we deliver a gallery of 20. This way if they want more they pay extra for those images. The way that I teach is $65 an image, sets of three for $90, or the full gallery for $200. And that's on top of the mini session fee that they already paid. So when I get this question about not upselling my answer may not be what you want to hear. Don't do it! If they are getting a full gallery then it's a small full session. Now, say you're going to do it, then price it at $450 or $500 because that's what you would get from upselling. If you don't like the sound of that I would just encourage you to consider. You're leaving a lot of revenue on the table in upselling! Upselling doesn't have to be intimidating either. I don't do IPS, instead I use automated emails. If that interests you grab my Shootproof Upselling Mini Course now!

Should You Include Venue Fees?

So across the board the answer is yes. It should be included in your pricing, but let's break it down by full sessions and mini sessions. My associate team, for example, likes to use this indoor greenhouse in the Dallas area. If a client wants to book there we let them know it's $70/hour. The client will pay us the $70 and we pay to book it. Super simple. Now for mini sessions I advise students to include it in the session. If you are doing 4 minis/hour and the rental for a red truck is $150/hour, then divide that into 4 and add it to the cost of each mini session. You shouldn't eat that out of pocket it should be collectively covered by the clients.

How Do I Price My Full Session?

This is specifically aimed toward those that do mini sessions. So how do you price full sessions when you offer minis to where it makes sense? A good rule of thumb is full sessions should be at least double your mini sessions. If your minis are $150 then your full session should be at least $300. Don't worry about timeframes. Mini Sessions should cost more per hour or more per image than full sessions. Price in a way that is profitable! Check out this episode for further resources: Episode 67.

If you have more questions or specific pricing Q&A, send me a DM on Instagram and I'd be happy to help!

What We Discussed

Do You Charge the Full Amount Upfront? (3:12)

What Do You Charge for Headshots (6:40)

Mini Session Price That Includes a Full Gallery (8:19)

Should You Include Venue Fees? (10:17)

How Do I Price my Full Session? (12:18)

70. Creating A Mini-Session Client Experience

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 30 May 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

Resources Mentioned: $3k Mini Sessions Blueprint | Client Questionnaire | Client Experience Guide | Email Templates | Free Posing Class

Today we're talking about one of my all-time favorite topics...MINI SESSIONS! We'll be covering how to craft your mini session client experience and it's going to be fun. Before jumping in I want to make my $3k Mini Sessions Blueprint available to you! It's a free guide to walk you through making your first $3000 on a single date of minis. It's not just possible, but it's repeatable! You can use this guide as a blueprint and do it over and over again. Ready to dive into minis? Let's start with crafting your mini session client experience...

Look at Your Communication

Ask yourself, what emails are you sending and how are they serving your clients? Since mini sessions are, well, mini... that means your communication needs to be thorough. You want to connect with clients before and after the session so they feel loved and nurtured. Prior to meeting, what emails are you sending? Right away I think of inquiry emails (what's your response like?), contract and invoice emails, a questionnaire or client experience guide (this is gold because you get to know your client and they feel cared for and attended to). I highly suggest adding a questionnaire to your workflow and if you don't have one grab mine from the shop: Client Questionnaire. I also send a Client Experience Guide. The goal is to answer any questions they have, give them styling tips, tips to get their kids to cooperate, etc. Last but not least, the final info email! This gives them instructions to the session, last minute details and reminders for what's ahead. If all these are overwhelming don't sweat it. They're all included in my Email Templates. You can customize then put them to work for you!

Prepare the Parents

For family photographers, how well the kids do during a session plays a major role in the overall experience. It's my job as the photographer to make sure parents are prepared beforehand. This is also found in my Client Experience Guide. My job is to equip the parents with some tips for things that they can do before the session with their kids to help prepare them so that the session goes smoothly. I encourage them to bring bribes and assure them I am prepared for kids. This equipping is so important for a mini session!

Nail Your Posing

We want to avoid awkward and stiff! Having a posing workflow is vital. It gives a full gallery and ultimately makes the session go smoothly. You want your client experience to be wonderful before they ever get photos back. I've got a free posing class that will be a big help. You can also grab my posing workflow inside that class for free! Posing really makes a difference in how your client feels throughout the session. Have a plan, use a workflow and nail it!

Add Personal Touches

This is the "surprise & delight" of a session. I actually have a masterclass with my dear friends, James & Jess, who are the masters at this particular topic. It's found inside my Behind the Lens membership. Every month you get access to a new Masterclass and a Behind the Scenes session where you get to be a virtual shadow to me on my personal sessions. If you join that membership you get immediate access to current and past content! A few things that you can do to surprise and delight could be hand written notes, cookies after the session or ornaments at Christmas time. Any and all of this makes such a difference in crafting your mini session client experience!

What We Discussed

Look at Your Communication (2:42)

Prepare the Parents (6:03)

Nail Your Posing (8:07)

Add Personal Touches (10:39)

69. Practical Tips for Personal Social Media Marketing with Katelyn Workman

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 23 May 2022 06:00:00 -0500

*placeholder*

68. How To Get Motivated When Work Feels Hard

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 16 May 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

This is an interesting topic: how to get motivated when work FEELS hard! Honestly, sometimes "work" feels hard. Now I'm not talking about the corporate job you may have! I'm specifically referring to those who are doing photography. You know, those who are running their own photography biz and some days you just don't feel like editing or culling or bringing vision to what you love! Before diving in...

I wanted to give you the opportunity to jump into this FREE class called "Keys to Effective Family Posing, Goodbye Awkward & Stiff"! This is a fresh class all about posing families! We put it out a few months ago and the feedback was amazing. So many of you found it beneficial, so if you haven't checked it out you should! You'll leave with very practical things you can use at your next session.

Now, by all means when you hit that wall you should pause and decide if need rest. Your body/brain will give you signals to rest. And that is so important to respond and allow yourself to take a day off. But there are times when you've got to do some hard things that need to get done. Today we'll talk about some tips to help you get motivated when work feels hard and you flat out just don't want to!

Commit to Your Deadline (With Wiggle Room)

We all have our contracts and our goals. I tell my clients I will get their photos back to them in 2 weeks, although, my actual goal is 1 week. I believe committing to your deadlines are powerful and important. When you plan for wiggle room then you can over serve your clients. But, it's important to honor your word and stick to the contract/deadline you put in place. Here's the key: knowing your deadlines and committing to them beforehand makes it that much easier to stick to them when it gets hard. Those deadlines help us to continue to make progress with things!

Create Workflows

A workflow is simply a checklist of things that are done every time. For example, my team and I use Trello which is a free online business management tool. Basically it's a virtual board of checklists (we LOVE it). This helps me so much because on the days I don't feel like doing anything I can open Trello and look at the checklist. It makes sure everything gets done and allows me to see what HAS to get done for today. Plus, I am a checklist person so there is gratification in checking it off my list! This literally makes me feel productive even when I don't necessarily want to be. Whether the workflow is made up of things you need to do or automations they are valuable! Speaking of automations: I use Dubsado to automate as many things as possible and that is a game changer. I have a Dubsado Workflow in my shop you can take a look at! It translates to Honeybook or other CRMs and shows you how to set up automations. That way you can set it and forget it!

Plan With a Playbook

Another thing that helps you preserve that brainstorming juice is having a playbook to plan by! I use my Mini Sessions Playbook and it keeps me on track feeling accomplished without having to think about it. It start from 8 weeks out from your session and plans out what's needed each week. This leads up to the day of your minis and after. All you have to do is run the play!

Do That One Thing

On days you don't have 100% to give choose one thing that you can move the ball forward on. I'm a big believer in progress not perfection. So, it's easier to choose one thing: maybe clearing out your inbox, maybe responding to DMs, etc. Just pick something and complete it. This allows you to clear a part of your "to-dos" and won't exhaust you!

Change of Scenery

If you'r like me and you work from home your office can either be a place you're running to or running from! A lot of times just getting out of the "funk" allows your creative juices to start flowing again. Move your work outside, to your living room, even your bed! Somedays working from bed is just what you need to rest and check off that one thing!

Go Back to Your Why

Last, but not least (and truly most importantly) go back to the reason you started! Remembering why you are doing this can give purpose back into the day in and day out hustle. What made you become a photographer? Why did you start this business? Reflecting on our why gives us fuel to do it. It will help you get motivated when you work feels hard!

Links Mentioned

+ Keys to Effective Family Posing, Goodbye Awkward & Stiff

+ Dubsado Workflow

+ Mini Sessions Playbook

What We Discussed

Commit to Your Deadline (5:29)

Create Workflows (8:43)

Plan With a Playbook (11:21)

Do That One Thing (12:41)

Change of Scenery (13:24)

Go Back to Your Why (14:04)

67. Is It Time To Raise Your Prices?

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 09 May 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

Ready to talk about the question that seems to linger in your mind? Is it time to raise your prices?!

Before diving fully into the subject I wanted to make this FREE class available to you! I offered it for the first time about a month or so ago and it's called "Keys to Effective Family Posing: Goodbye Awkward & Stiff!" It covers all things posing. I had the greatest feedback when this class first went out. If posing is your weakest link or you struggle with the flow of a session you will want to check this out.

I wish there was a timeline of when you should raise your prices, but the truth is that really doesn't exist. And I also know there is a point of your prices just being too high. For today's episode we're going to walk through some guidelines that you can use to know when it is time to raise your prices!

If You're Not Profitable...

First and foremost a HUGE determining factor is if you're profitable! If you don't know whether or not you're profitable there's a simple way to find out. It's called running a CODB - "cost of doing business". For sake of time you can use this YouTube video "How to Price Your Photography to Be Profitable" to determine your CODB. I walk you through the entire equation and help you find the right numbers!

If You're Fully Booked...

Let me just preface: fully booked looks different for everyone. But, if you find yourself being fully booked for 2 or 3 months as a family photographer it's probably time to raise your prices. Obviously if you're part time or full time you being fully booked won't look the same. When I was a youth pastor and only did photography part time being fully booked meant my Saturday was booked. I only had the weekends to shoot and I wanted to save Sundays for family so if I had sessions on Saturday that meant I was fully booked! Structure your calendar and determine which days you want to work. When you see the next 2 months are booked for the days you've determined it's probably time to raise your prices!

If You Want to Increase Your Revenue...

Maybe you're not fully booked, but you're doing fine with your current rate. If you want to be bringing in more at the end of your year you need to increase your revenue! So if you want to increase your revenue, you need to either increase your prices or increase the number of bookings that you're getting. This is typically how it was for me in the early years when photography was my side-gig. I wasn't necessarily fully booked, but I wanted to increase my revenue. What I did was increase my prices every season. I went up $50 before Fall, then again before Spring. Do this until you find your sweet spot!

Common Pricing Concerns

Will clients complain? Maybe, but this is your business. You have to do what's right for you! Will you lose clients? Maybe, but you'll also be reaching a new client market. And lastly I will say this, if you're not making a profit and want to don't slowly raise your prices. Raise your prices to be profitable and do it overnight. You don't have to announce or prepare anyone. Be confident in what you do, find the sweet spot and keep enjoying your photography journey!

Links Mentioned

+ How to Price Your Photography to Be Profitable

+ Keys to Effective Family Posing: Goodbye Awkward & Stiff

What We Discussed

Not Profitable (2:56)

Fully Booked (4:38)

If You Want to Increase Your Revenue (7:38)

Common Pricing Concerns (10:19)

66. Building A Sustainable Schedule with Sabrina Gebhardt

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 02 May 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

I have special guest Sabrina Gebhardt today to talk all about building a sustainable schedule! It can be a lot to manage: building a business, being a parent, a spouse all while keeping your sanity. Sabrina is a lifestyle photography out of Fort Worth, TX who also educates! You may have seen her on Instagram Live answering ALL the questions. Now, let's jump into the conversation!

Squirrel Syndrome

Creatives tend to have all kinds of ideas. Usually they don't lack for vision, but because of the amount of new ideas and projects they don't always finish the ones they start. And here's the thing, some of those ideas are to help organize and build a sustainable schedule, but the follow through isn't there. Maybe you've thought, "I'll batch schedule" or "I'll have a routine". But then, while juggling your current things your creative brain starts adding more! Are any of you relating? Sadly, without boundaries, saying no, or having follow through you will meet burn out face to face.

Sustainable Looks Different for Everyone

The beauty of humanity is just how diverse we all are. There is not one person that's been copied and pasted in the world. So why do we look at others and still battle the comparison trap? Imposter syndrome is a real thing! As photographers we need the internet. Social media is often how we gain new clients. So, we can't just close our eyes to the world around us. That's not solving comparison, it's hiding from it. You each have to determine what matters to you and what you can handle. The amount of sessions one can handle in a month, versus the amount of sessions you can handle in a month is totally different. Because some have kids that are different ages, and we all have different support systems. Just because you CAN do all the things doesn't mean you can do them well. Building a sustainable schedule will look different to everyone. It speaks to what success looks like to you, which is different for everyone!

The Reality of Your Schedule

Take a blank calendar (print one off the internet) and put in your dream work. Start with your personal commitments! This is often where entrepreneurs get it wrong. They think the client comes first! No, think through what a standard week looks like. Include carpools, sports, if you have regular therapy or doctor's appointments, if you've got a full time job, if you want to prioritize date night! I mean literally all of your personal things, going to the gym, Bible study, etc. Now you can effectively plan a life you're participating in. If you have an extra hour on Friday that doesn't necessarily mean you can shoot another session! It's not just the shoot you're planning. It's the driving, emailing, culling, editing, etc! So if you've only got 7 hours available per week, for work time, you're probably only taking one client! Stick to your boundaries, and give your best version of yourself to those around you.

The Boundary Conversation

Setting appropriate boundaries are healthy. This starts with knowing yourself. When are your best work hours? Are you a morning person or night owl? It's ok to set work hours and when those hours are up literally shut off that part of your brain. For some, you need to start utilizing auto responders for client emails. Maybe you need to put your phone on "Do Not Disturb" at a certain time in the evening. Understanding that in order for others to effectively be served by you means you have to be taken care of. Photographers, you have contracts in place to help you operate in boundaries! Because we are the CEO, we created this business, we decide the rules. As long as we have clearly defined boundaries and laid out those expectations up front we protect ourselves and those inquiring of us.

5 Step Summary

Number 1, know your capacity! Figure out how much time you're spending with your client and effectively plan. Number 2, put pen to paper and schedule out your personal time first. Number 3, create whitespace. That literally means allowing for blank space. Don't plan your "rest" time until it comes and you can decide what you need in that moment. Number 4, creating batch schedules! Lastly number 5, knowing how to put rest in your schedule after you've hustled! You have to plan rest. Especially after busy seasons you need to let yourself recover.

The goal is building a sustainable schedule that will ultimately sustain us through the years!

Links Mentioned

+ Sabrina's Free Business Blueprint

+ Sabrina's Website

+ Sabrina's Instagram

What We Discussed

Squirrel Syndrome (3:08)

Sustainable Looks Different For Everyone (8:50)

The Reality of Your Schedule (16:42)

The Boundary Conversation (24:21)

5 Step Summary (32:34)

65. Mastermind or Course - Which Is Right For You?

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 25 Apr 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

Let's continue the conversation circling around masterminds. We'll talk through masterminds and courses and really which one will suit you best! I'm also happy to announce my own mastermind application is OPEN!!! My next round goes from June - November and I can't wait to start filling in the spots for those of you who fit. You can fill out your application HERE. It's a first come first serve basis so don't wait, send in your application asap. Can't wait to get started!

Time Difference

Let's walk through the difference of the two - mastermind vs. course. Often, students ask me what they get that's different than taking one of my courses. The first major difference is the time commitment. In a course, it's up to you to go at your own pace. For some personalities that's great, but for others that means you really won't get it finished! A mastermind is much more accountable. The time commitment looks different because we'll go over something (educationally), then you'll get some homework. That requires you to stay invested. Usually you have a call each week or every other, then in between you're applying what was discussed. I think that's a big benefit with masterminds. They typically cost more, but you also are required to stay connected and get work done.

Content Individualization

Courses really have to be broad. When I say that I mean they teach you an overall concept. Courses can be beneficial to a general public whereas masterminds are specific to those attending. See in a mastermind the coach or mentor is teaching to the individuals in the group. So if you have a specific question to your business you have the ability to ask and get direct answers. There are pros and cons to both, but you just have to identify where you're at and what you want. Maybe you're in a season where you can't be "all" in your photography, but you want to continue growing.. a course will allow you to do that! Masterminds exist to launch you into that next level. My mastermind is called the Level Up Mastermind because it will help you level yourself up!

Personalized + Accessible

One of the things I LOVE about masterminds is the feedback. One mastermind I took was about photography, but I ended up pulling on the coach for financial advice and to this day it has helped me tremendously! Not only are you getting coaching from an experienced person, but the community from those in the group is phenomenal. Maybe you don't look for that or need it, but we can benefit from an outsider looking in, saying "yes, you're doing a great job!" Remember the saying, it's not about what you know but who you know? The connections I've made over the years from masterminds are still ones I'm grateful for.

Mastermind vs. Course

If you're still on the fence and not sure if you're ready or a good fit, fill out the application anyway! Let me look things over, have that conversation with you and ultimately help you decide if it's the right time. I never accept people into my masterminds if I don't think it's the right fit for them. Maybe you need a few months to get things more solidified and that's ok! I've done this a few times now and can at least point you in a direction that will get you there.

Links Mentioned

+ Level Up Mastermind Waitlist

What We Discussed

Time Difference(3:29)

Content Individualization (8:53)

Personalized + Accessible (14:05)

Mastermind vs. Course (15;43)

64. Should You Join A Mastermind?

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 18 Apr 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

Have you ever been part of a mastermind? Over the past few years the term "coaching" has really taken off in the business world. The idea of gathering with like minded entrepreneurs to learn and be coached along is genius! What is a mastermind? Typically it is a group of 4-12 people who have a mastermind coach. The "coach" facilitates this ongoing discussion with a group coaching style. So, length of time and format can differ producing variations of masterminds. So, if you've been on the fence or questioned, "should you join a mastermind?" by the end of this you will have your answer!

First, here's a brand new FREE class just for you called Keys to Effective Posing! We've heard such good feedback from those that have taken it already. If you missed the chance to take it, click HERE and dive in. Posing is such an important part of what we as photographers do and I really wanted to hone in on this topic and give you something to grow in.

Know the Basics Beforehand

For a photography mastermind you should already know the basics. You should have these 3 things down: Know how to shoot, Have a website, Get bookings from paying clients. If you don't that's ok! I recommend taking a course vs. a mastermind at that point because there are lots of details to learn. It would be a better investment to take a course to learn those basics so you can go at your own pace and get it within yourself! Masterminds are typically for those that are ready to "level-up" and it's just so much easier when you have a foundation established.

Go in with Goals

It's difficult for a coach to get you where you want to go without an end goal in mind! I have a mastermind and I like to ask those attending, "where do you want to see yourself in the next year?". As a coach I know how to take you from point A to point B. I can give you steps to take and tools to help make your goals happen, but I can't give you the goal. If I did you may not be committed to it because the idea wasn't cultivated in your heart. So, you may not have the drive to get there for the simple fact that it's not your goal or vision. Should you join a mastermind? Yes, if you have a goal or vision for where you want to be in a year from now!

You're Aware of Your Struggles

A huge part of masterminds is the one on one access you get to the coach. For instance, in my mastermind you have access to me through Voxer and Slack. Voxer is basically voice messaging so you can ask questions, get info, etc. A course format only allows the educator to talk. In a mastermind you can ask specific questions and get direction/answers which really play a role in the whole group. The questions often navigate the direction of the group. I say all this to address: if you're unaware of where you struggle you most likely won't know what questions to ask! For my mastermind, you fill out an application and one of the questions pertains to where you struggle. Don't stress! This is a good thing. Identifying the struggle will help eliminate it!

You Like Personalized Coaching + Accountability

We briefly touched on this, but masterminds are meant to be "intimate". The purpose is to be personal and in your business. But, don't let that scare you - you need someone's eyes on what you're doing. Especially someone you want to glean from. They can see things in a perspective that you may not see. They will hold you accountable which makes you grow. This happens in my mastermind all the time - other people in the group keep you on track and hype you up! I've had students share how the courses they took were great, but the mastermind involved them verbally sharing goals. And when you let others in on your vision there's a level of accountability to actually make it happen!

Should You Join a Mastermind?

YES! I love the community it builds and the reality of reaching goals. Not only have I been in masterminds, but I've hosted them as well. I can tell you it's so worth the investment. You learn in an environment that's so personalized you can't help but achieve goals. If you've never been part of one, but you're thinking "wow, this is what I need to reach my next level" go for it! My mastermind is designed to give personalized coaching, accountability, and a tight knit community! If that sounds like something you desire join my waitlist - applications open next week! Applications will be sent first to my waitlist and the spots are limited. I really comb through and make sure it's a good fit for those applying. Apply HERE and watch this next year be one of growth!

Links Mentioned

+ Keys to Effective Posing (Free Class!)

+ Level Up Mastermind Waitlist

What We Discussed

Know the Basics (3:57)

Go in with Goals (8:37)

You're Aware of Your Struggles (11:43)

You Like Personalized Coaching + Accountability (12:58)

Should You Join a Mastermind? (16:28)

63. Tips For Hiring Your First Contractors

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 11 Apr 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

Have you been interested in outsourcing or maybe you're creeping up to that moment? Either category, I believe us business owners should get to the place where outside help is needed and a benefit. I'm very passionate about team building so get ready for some major tips for hiring your first contractors!

Before jumping into it I want to give you a FREE resource to help level up your mini sessions game! You can make more with your mini sessions, so this resource will help you make your first $3,000 on a single set of minis. It's called $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint and here's one of the best parts - you can reuse it over and over again! Now let's dive in...

What is a Contractor

Let's define this. This is not someone who is who is an employee (part-time or full time). They are paid on a retainer basis. Maybe it's monthly and they are required to do a set number of hours, etc. This may look like an editor, a copy writer, an administrative assistant or a social media manager.

Let me shatter the idea that you can do everything. Sorry! But we all are limited to a 24 hour day and it shouldn't be spent 100% on your business or hobby. Many of us are moms or work other jobs. The business shouldn't be built on you and you alone. Want to know why? Burnout. It's ok to need help! The best business owners beat burnout by growing their team. Here are some tips for hiring your first contractors:

Write Out EVERYTHING You Do

When you're thinking of hiring your first contractors think about ALL the things you do. Write them down from biggest to smallest, don't leave anything out. What takes up the most time? Now, circle the things only you can do. Before you start circling the entire list hear me out. Some people think they are the only ones who can respond to emails or post on social media... Listen, people are talented to match your brand voice. So don't trip yourself up in the thought process that you should be doing this or that. Delegation is a blessing. Here's my rule of thumb: if someone can do something 80% as good as you can, then you can outsource it!

Record Your Processes for Easier Training

If you're thinking in the next 6-12 months you'd like to hire, start recording your processes. My team LOVES using loom. This program is free, it has a chrome plugin that you can use, but basically allows you to record yourself. You can talk while screen recording to explain what you're doing and how. So, start recording what you want to train someone on and when the time comes to hire you can have them utilize these videos! Trust me, training just got a whole lot easier. You can put together a whole library of training videos to avoid having to sync up schedules with your new hire to walk them through something!

Start Small

Don't overshoot your hire. A lot of contractors of packages you can choose from. My first hire's smallest package was 10 hrs/month for like $30/hr. What could you do with those extra 10 hours a month? Book an extra session and pay for the contractor and you already "bought" yourself more time! Start small and grow from there. This is testing ground for you and your contractor. Develop your processes, grow in your delegation and watch yourself flourish!

Learn to Trust and Let Go

It takes time to let someone else run with what you value. For most of us, this business is our "baby". You don't let anyone hold your baby, but over time you should develop trust to hand it off. This doesn't mean you don't care about it, but you can allow someone else to care for your business. I encourage you to lean into discomfort. Things don't grow out of comfort. When I started passing things off I freaked out! I wouldn't even let my administrative assistant respond to emails. I had her organize and flag emails I needed to respond to. Over time I developed a trust in her and eventually handed off most emails that required a response!

Now, there is another side to trust that I want to mention, and my team calls it trust and verify. So in those first several weeks that you're working with somebody, you can trust them with a new task. But then, it's smart as the business owner to come alongside and verify that the task got done the way that you wanted. You're not micro-managing, but you're checking in to give yourself space to breathe easy.

Questions?

Where do I look for contractors? I highly suggest word of mouth! Ask those you trust already if they have suggestions or utilize your FB groups. There's a website called Outsourcing with Love that one of my team members worked with before so she's a credible source. She has vetted contractors that you can work with!

What can I expect to pay a contractor? I would say the typical intro rate is about $30/hour. You may see a bit more or less, but that seems average. Now if you're hiring someone more specialized you should expect to pay more. They've spent more time in that area so they will help tremendously! You get what you pay for, right?!

What should I outsource first? As a photographers, I suggest your editing, because it's really, really easy to book that into your cost. And it's very inexpensive. Another thing that I would suggest outsourcing first would be your social media scheduling. Maybe you're not comfortable with them writing your captions, but they can get your posts out! Hope these tips for hiring your first contractors gives you courage to take the next step, you'll be happy you did!

Links Mentioned

+ My $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint

+ Loom

+ Outsourcing with Love

+ Trello

What We Discussed

What is a Contractor? (2:28)

Write Everything Down (4:22)

Record Your Processes for Easier Training (11:52)

Start Small (14:18)

Learnt to Trust and Let Go (16:01)

Questions (20:06)

62. Pleasing People vs. Serving People

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 04 Apr 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

Have you ever wondered if you're riding the line of pleasing people vs. serving people? I've wanted to talk about this for a while, and finally have the space to do it. Our desire is to serve people as best we can, but many of us start sliding into the arena of pleasing people. There is quite a difference between the two.

I also want to equip you as best as possible, so here's a free resource I'd love for you to grab! My student's call me the Queen of Minis and we're all in the thick of minis season right now. This is a blueprint that's completely free and will level up your minis game. If you've never made $3000 on your minis session then this is for you! It's called $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint!

Defining Your Job as a Photographer

Most of us start off thinking our role is to please our clients or simply make them happy. And really this topic is one to be looked at by any business owner. The truth is, pleasing people is deceptive. In the moment it seems valid and right. But at the end of the day the raving reviews will fade away and we're left to ourselves. We have to determine in the height of our careers and in the every day grind that what we're doing is not just dependent upon another's opinion.

It can be a tricky thing, wanting people to value your character and slipping over into letting that define you. I will say, it's not wrong to desire good reviews and response. But it should be because of your integrity! We should want people to think highly of us, not because of how we please them or what we offer them in exchange for their high opinion. But because of the quality of who we are.

What's the Motivation?

When it comes to pleasing people vs. serving people you have to ask yourself, what's my motivation? Often times, pleasing others is rooted in selfish ambition. I want to please you so you can benefit me. Every business needs to establish standards and morals. I strive to keep the same standard regardless of what opinion I'm facing. When your motivation is to serve people well most times you end up pleasing them, but you're not seeking approval. You're goal isn't selfish, it's for others! When you know your standards you can "judge" yourself based on how you served them. So when you don't get back high praise your soul isn't crushed because the goal was to serve clients well. When you perform your standards and do all the things you set out to do it goes far beyond the transaction.

Serving and Profit can go Hand in Hand

I do understand this is a business. Clearly a standard in my business is to serve clients, but that doesn't mean it's a charity. Don't get it twisted. You don't have to lower your prices or give things away. Photography is my family's sole income. That means we need to be profitable if we want to put food on the table. But this business is also my ministry. I want to serve people well and I can do it through the love of Jesus. I was a youth minister for 9 years and transitioned into doing photography full time. I saw how God opened the door for me and my family to reach people's hearts through photography.

This is not my typical podcast, but I believe this matters. When we get it right we'll see a lot less burn out as photographers! The mindset shift in pleasing people vs. serving people can help you set up a long lasting business. Stop back next week for a practical episode, and for more resources check out below!

Links Mentioned

+ My $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint

+ How I Set Goals in my Business

What We Discussed

Defining Your Job (3:18)

What's the Motivation? (6:09)

Serving and Profit can go Hand in Hand (11:28)

61. How To Use A Posing Workflow

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 28 Mar 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

I can't wait to dive into this episode. I've been hinting toward a posing workflow the past few weeks and I really want to unpack what a posing workflow is, how to use a posing workflow and how I do it in my own business!

Honestly, before talking about a workflow I have to announce my NEW Family Posing Course is officially LIVE! This has been in the works for the past 3 months and really I've been cultivating content and resources in my mind for the past year and a half. This course is finally a one stop course and is all encompassing! Not only do we look at posing families with young kids, families with older kids, or adult children, but we talk about posing teenagers. I even have a section that covers posing maternity sessions, lifestyle, newborn and senior sessions! Seriously is hits every aspect of what you would need for POSING. It's currently ON SALE and for the lowest price it will ever be at since it's brand new!

Now, on the theme of posing we're really closing out this "series" we've been doing the past few weeks. I wanted to walk through how to use a posing workflow. Let's take a look..

Workflow Defined

A posing workflow is basically having an order of things. Truly an organization set in place to help you process through your session. With a workflow in place, you achieve a few things. You'll remove awkward moments where you don't know what to do next, it helps you use your time efficiently, and it's repeatable! A posing workflow is important because it's meant to help you. It keeps your session moving and allows you to be relational with your client without losing time. I've had repeat customers that I do change things up for, but a lot of my clients actually enjoy seeing photos in similar poses from year to year. It showcases the growth of their family, especially kids! So don't worry about the idea of wash, rinse and repeat. A workflow has been my saving grace!

How to Use a Posing Workflow

Now, I'm going to walk you through my personal posing workflow and feel free to take notes, write it down, make adjustments! Something to note is this goal: as little movement as possible! Moving people takes time. So, I always start a session posing the whole family together. The reason behind that is to get everyone comfortable (especially those littles). The family isn't singled out they are with each other and it promotes a comfortable environment. From there, I move to just mom and the kids. I have dad step behind me so if kids are looking at dad they are giving the camera their attention. Then I swap. Kids stay put and mom and dad switch places! Again, as little movement as possible. I do trade kids around so it's not just a copy and paste.

Next, I pull dad out and just squish the kids together. When mom and dad are not next to the kids, I try to corral and make sure everyone is staying where they need to be. It's even more important to be intentional with my words and to go quickly. So, all the kids are together and I usually do a few variations. Then, I do individuals of each kid. This is a must-have. Especially for me, when doing minis, I want to include as many must-have shots as possible. The goal is the client either buys the full gallery or adds on these extra must-haves! I'll do a close up and a full body shot of each kid. Typically, I'll start oldest to youngest unless the younger ones are ready. Let's face it you only have their attention for a short span of time!

Lastly, I try getting the whole family together once more. This isn't something I have to have, so I save it for the end. Sometimes everyone is more comfortable, I can use these for face swaps if need be, and it gives me a chance to do more "specialty" groupings. Maybe that's mom and dad kissing in the background while the kids are covering the eyes in the foreground. And I always end with asking if there are specific shots the family wants. Now, don't make the mistake of asking this without first reassuring them you got everything on your list. They need to know you as the photographer covered everything. But this puts the ball in their court and allows them to think of specifics. Remember, when you use a workflow you end up saving yourself time so you can ask if there are extra needed shots!

Need more about posing? Check out my new Family Posing Course! I show all the variations that I do with each grouping. So when I do just mom and the kids, what kind of shots do I get? How do I pose them? What specific variations Am I getting? What words am I saying to you? And what posing prompts am I using to get them where I need them? Those are all things I cover in the course. If you have questions about the course check out this page and feel free to DM me! I can't wait for this to answer all the questions you have about posing!

Links Mentioned

+New Family Posing Course

What We Discussed

Workflow Defined (3:29)

Whole Family Together (10:27)

Mom and the Kids (11:19)

Dad and the Kids (12:16)

Just the Kids (13:13)

Whole Family Again (15:33)

Last Question (17:23)

60. Tips For Posing When Dad Is Just Not Into It

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 21 Mar 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

Friends have you ever been in a session when Dad is just not into it?! I feel like it doesn't happen as often as we tend to think, but there are the occasional shoots where you've got to be extra strategic to create genuine photos. Before opening up this topic on tips for posing when Dad is just not into it, I wanted to let you know of a FREE live class this week on POSING! There are 3 times to join happening on Wednesday and Thursday. The class is called The Keys to Effortless Family Posing: Say Goodbye to Awkward and Stiff! If you want to get comfortable with posing your families, not just families with toddlers, but all different kinds of families then this class is for you. Register HERE to claim your spot and receive the replay! Only those that register will get the replay, so if you won't make the class you can still get the recording! So here are some great tips for posing when Dad is just not into it.

Confidence Extinguishes Hesitation

I've had a few sessions where everything was set up perfectly, the lighting is brilliant and the family looks gorgeous, but for some reason there was tension surrounding Dad. Maybe he was having an off day, maybe pictures make him uncomfortable or maybe he just flat out didn't want to do the session in the first place. One thing you can do to "combat" this is to be confident. I know I mentioned this point in my last podcast. Here's the thing, if Dad is already in this state of mind you don't want to give him any ammunition toward you as the photographer or his wife who dragged him there! Don't let the attitude effect you. You control your attitude and really the feel of the session.

Keep Things Moving

No one really likes waiting around, especially a Dad who is uninterested. Something you can do is stay active and keep the session going. Don't waste time with the fluff of small talk. And here's the beauty of mini sessions -- they are only 10-15 minutes! I will tell the Dad if I sense he's giving me attitude or just is unhappy that I need your focus for 10 minutes then you can be done. One of my strategies is using my workflow. Essentially, I have a set of poses or groupings that I do in order, every single time, with every single family. By having that in place, it helps me to know what's coming next. And, therefore, I'm keeping the session moving.

Encourage Good Behavior

Just like we reward our kids with good behavior we should encourage adults with good behavior. I know this sounds silly, but if Dad is being childish then you have the freedom to put him in the same category as the kids. That means when you're giving direction it's directed to the Mom. Most of the time Mom already feels embarrassed because she's aware of the tension so you encouraging her is a huge help! Don't give attention to the frustration. Rather, encourage mom because dad is just not into it. Encouraging the right behavior is letting Mom be seen. You're rewarding her for taking time to make this happen. Take advantage of the moment and pour into her, she probably needs it!

Focusing on the big picture is crucial in these moments. These tips for posing when dad is just not into it can make a difference. Give voice to why photos are valuable and remember these cases are few and far between. Most of the time Dad is happy to be there. He's excited to be capturing memories and freezing time for a moment. When you have a tough session don't let your emotions play into the situation. Be the confident photographer that you are, keep your session moving and encourage all the good behavior! You should feel confident in your posing because that is the art of what we do. And don't forget to register for the free classes happening this week. We will have a live Q&A so if you have questions I'm not touching on this is your chance to get answers!

Links Mentioned

+ New FREE class: The Keys to Effortless Family Posing: Say Goodbye to Awkward and Stiff

+ More Posing Podcasts

What We Discussed

Confidence Extinguishes Hesitation (4:53)

Keep Things Moving (6:14)

Encourage Good Behavior (8:38)

59. One Thing I Do To Give My Clients The Best Experience

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 14 Mar 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

Are you ready to dive deep into one of the biggest needs in the family photography industry?! Everyone desires help in this specific area. The one thing I do to give my clients the best experience possible is POSING. Every client will walk away feeling much more confident when us photographers lead them throughout the session. When our client's experience is positive that leads them to booking more sessions and telling their friends about us. Posing is necessary and important!

Before getting into all the technicalities, I'm doing a FREE class next week and wanted it on your radar! it's called The Keys to Effortless Family Posing: Say Goodbye to Awkward and Stiff. So, this is a class that has been highly requested. Seriously, it's been on my radar for over a year and a half. We want families to look natural and create genuine memories not stiff, awkward photos. This brand new (never been done before) class is March 23rd and 24th! You can sign up HERE. Make sure you take advantage of the live Q&A and get ready for posing to become second nature! If you do register there is a replay that will automatically get sent to you, but you must register! I'm looking forward to seeing you!

Client Experience Matters

At the end of the day people won't remember how technically correct their photos are. The thing they hang onto the most are how they felt during their session. If clients feel awkward and stiff without guidance in their session it sticks with them. Even if your photos are incredible they view them through this lens of awkward. The goal with guiding clients through posing is creating a warm, genuine, real moments. Posing truly can make or break a session. We've all been there when we go to a session and the moment we're supposed to start taking photos we kind of freeze! As photographers we invest in our websites, our CRMs and all these places, but what about our guidance in posing?! It's something that gets put on the back burner and we end up winging it! So, here are three things you can apply at your next session. These are things I do to give my clients the best experience possible!

Be Confident

Clients will pick up on your tone. If you're unsure or unprepared they will feel it! In one sense your persona determines theirs. We want to be confident in the way that we speak and the way that we pose. We should move with intentionality and give as many examples as we can. Maybe that means you're actually showing them the pose and not just trying to tell them how to pose. Giving them a visual of where to put their hand or angle their body helps so much! Be confident and be prepared. Have the next pose or placement ready because that feels like you know what you're doing. You've heard the saying, "fake it 'til you make it". Practice at home, use a mirror or your family. Practice speaking clearly, boldly and in a way that brings understanding.

Posing Preparation

Just like a test, this is something you need to study beforehand. I get into the habit before each session of arriving early and having a posing game plan in place. I'm thinking of the family and because I've sent them my Client Questionnaire I know the ages of each child. So I can easily think through which poses I'm going to use. Maybe that means you're turning to Pinterest to look for inspiration for that specific age demographic to get ideas. I also have a Posing Workflow I use, so I have the same groupings that I shoot every time. Go into your session with a plan, knowing what poses you want to use so your client senses your confidence.

It's Ok to Use a Cheatsheet

Here's a cheatsheet hack that I think is genius! Create a collage of poses and save it on your phone as the lock screen wallpaper. This way it's somewhat inconspicuous and you can glance at it to know what you're doing next! Another, even more inconspicuous cheatsheet, is having a list or printed out picture saved on your SD card. This way your "cheatsheet" is on your camera and the client has no idea you are glancing at it for inspiration. They'll think you're looking at the photo you just captured! Again, there is nothing wrong with using prompts or written out poses to help guide you through. Eventually, the goal is to get to a place where you can confidently lead the session knowing exactly what you want. Don't let yourself stay there forever - you do need to trust yourself!

Posing is one thing I do to give my clients the best experience and there's so much more we can and will dive into. This is just scraping the surface on posing, but I hope it helps you get a game plan together and start executing your session with confidence.

Links Mentioned

+ New FREE class: The Keys to Effortless Family Posing: Say Goodbye to Awkward and Stiff

+ Client Questionnaire

+Posing Workflow

58. Tips For Posing Kids

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 07 Mar 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Posing is such a hot topic in the photography industry and I'm thrilled to be sharing some tips for posing those littles! Typically when people think "family photography" they cringe because their minds go straight to the kids. And I get it, kids can be unpredictable and messy and overwhelming! I have 2 little ones of my own and they can be a handful at times. But honestly, they are my favorite to photograph! Especially toddlers! They're funny and so fun to be around. If you're wondering how I can have this mindset as a photographer get ready for some practical tips for posing kids.

Now, before starting your note taking you need to grab this FREE $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint! I designed this freebie to help minis become a rinse and repeat session for you. If you've never made $3000.00 on a single set of minis this is for you. Inside, I walk you through the step by step process and here's the great part - it's repeatable! Similar to the blueprint for houses you can use it over and over again. Friend, this is not a hoax, this is the process I use and it works!

Comfortable with You and Your Camera

This should be the first thing you think of! Think about it, for the kids you are total stranger danger. I like to include questions to the parent about their kids. What are some things they enjoy? What are their favorite activities, etc. Try getting to know them so they feel more comfortable around you. Interact with mom and dad or older siblings so they see - this person is ok!

A big aspect that photographers don't think about is getting them comfortable being around your camera. To us it's become an extension of ourselves, but to them it's a giant piece of equipment they may have never seen before! One thing I do, especially for those babies and toddlers, is snap a photo and then show them the back of my camera so they can see how it works. Most times they will be thrilled to see themselves! I mean every child, at some point, was mesmerized by the simplicity of a mirror so this really works.

Keep it Light and Fun

When preparing for a session I always encourage the parents to relax and enjoy! This is not the time for mom and dad to have to discipline the child for not listening or whatever the case may be. I tell the parents that I will take care of the kids! I don't want the memory for anyone to be difficult or a struggle. Interact with the kids and let them be kids. Play games, make jokes, pull out all the tricks! You don't want them getting yelled at for not smiling, then photo sessions seem like a chore for both the parents and the kids.

Use Posing Prompts

I love posing prompts because it give everyone something to do. Especially those little ones! Their attention span is often not very long and sitting for pictures can be a strenuous task if you're expected to stay still the whole time. Maybe you have some written down on your phone or you look over some before the session. If you want ideas, I've got a list of 60 prompts in my shop. It's called the Family Posing Mini Course. I have my step by step workflow of different poses I use and they help capture those sweet, genuine moments. A few examples would be "run as fast as you can around mommy and daddy" or "hold hands and bump each other on the hips" or "look at your favorite sibling". It's giving them something to do that doesn't seem so sterile like, sit there, smile and say cheese.

Follow Their Lead

So this is really plan b or c (Lol). Obviously you want to come prepared. Do your best to interact and make kids comfortable, have posing prompts to try, but it's perfectly fine to follow their lead. My own son is a total wanderer. A lot of toddlers are! They want to explore and see what's around them. That's ok! Let them play with the rocks or run a round a bit. Then, you can pull brother/sister next to them and smile to capture that really sweet moment. For me, some of my favorite photos of my now 3 year old are those candids. I want to remember those tiny toddler hands holding the pebbles he found. I'm fine with those photos of him running down a path or pointing to the sky because he saw an airplane! This is real life. The stiff poses where the kids look miserable aren't worth it. Trust me, parents want to remember how their kids were at these young stages of life. The crazy toddler stage is also the sweet stage where being a baby still lingers in them. Let kids be kids and follow their lead. You'll be glad you did!

Bribery at Its Finest

Last, but not least - use bribes. I am not above a good bribe especially for photos! Always have the client bring the bribe. You won't know if they have allergies or what their fave goodies are. Just be sure to instruct them not to bring messy bribes. You want to avoid anything with a color coating (m&ms, skittles). I usually suggest fruit snacks or marshmallows. Marshmallows are perfect because they are so clean and honestly not very noticeable. But here's the key with bribery: don't pull them out until they are needed. I instruct the clients to keep them hidden and ONLY pull them out when I say. If kids see them at the very beginning and we wouldn't have needed them until closer to the end we wasted valuable time. For older kids, a lot of times their bribe is, after this we'll get ice cream or something.

Those were just some quick tips for posing kids. And I may have a MASSIVE posing course coming out at the end of this month, so keep your ears open and eyes peeled! If you want to be the first to know about it, you can join my email list. Go to my Website or my Instagram to find ways to join and if you're having trouble you can always shoot me a DM! Hope this was helpful!

Links Mentioned

+ My $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint

+ 60 Posing Prompts

+ My Website

+ My Instagram

What We Discussed

Comfortable with You and Your Camera (2:54)

Keep it Light and Fun (5:03)

Follow Their Lead (7:21)

Bribery at its Finest (9:02)

57. Leveraging Socials To Grow Your Business with Kendra Swalls

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 28 Feb 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Are you ready for today's podcast?! This topic is asked among my students often. We're talking about how leveraging socials to grow your biz can be done! I've got special guest Kendra Swalls and who is an EXPERT when it comes to social media. She's a business and marketing coach with Girl Means Business. As moms, business owners and all the things in between I know social media can fall to the back burner, but that doesn't mean there isn't value in social media.

Why Social Media is Necessary

Social media acts as proof to your business. We all use it to some extent. When you're searching for a new dentist, daycare or pediatrician you examine them online before ever stepping foot inside. Social media is the first impression. People aren't just looking at websites anymore, they're looking to social media to give a glimpse inside the day to day workings of a business.

Depending on who your audience is really determines which platform(s) should be your emphasis. When it comes to the amount of interaction - it's best to be consistent. Be reliable and something people can count on. Find a way to be consistent with your own schedule. Do what works for you so you aren't facing burnout a month from now. Utilize social media to be sustainable!

You Don't Need to be Everywhere

Track your return on investment. This isn't just monetary investment, but time! As photographers Instagram is such a go to because it truly is an online portfolio. Take the time to do a little research about your own business. When clients find you, where did they find you? You'll be surprised to see which platform is benefitting your business. It can help you make better choices on where you're investing your time. A great way to hear from your clients is by using a Client Questionnaire. This can give you a pulse on your audience. Here's the golden rule: Be where your current and future clients are.

Biggest Tip for Utilizing Social Media

Get very clear on your intention of what you expect to get out of social media. Too many times people go in blindly thinking if they post a promo they will automatically fill all their dates. Rather, go into social media to build awareness around my brand. Maybe funnel people back to an email list or just build connections with people. You can leverage socials to grow your biz, but through a different perspective. People don't go to social media to book a session right away. They go to be entertained, inspired or educated.

Appeal to Your Audience

If you're a family photographer, you're not trying to appeal to the dad of the kids, you're appealing to the mom. She's the one who is going to be booking the session. She's the one who's doing the research. Next address questions and concerns your audience has. What are some frequently asked questions? Using a photo caption to educate your audience is leveraging your socials to grow your photography biz! Lastly, remember to engage with your audience. This doesn't just mean commenting on your own posts and responses. You should be going to other feeds, group, etc. and engaging. Don't "post and ghost"! You do need to give a little engagement to get a little engagement.

Connect with more Kendra Swalls content here:

+ Free Email Marketing Kit: www.girlmeansbusiness.com/emailkit

+ Website

+ Podcast

+ Resources

+ Instagram

What We Discussed

Why Social Media is Necessary (2:11)

You Don't Need to be Everywhere (8:21)

Biggest Tip for Utilizing Social Media (14:52)

Appeal to Your Audience (21:28)

56. How To Get More Eyes On Your Website With Emily Lee

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 21 Feb 2022 06:00:00 -0500

I can't wait for you to hear this week's podcast! There are so many other experts in our industry that have a lot to offer and today we have a special guest, Emily with By Emily Jane. She is a Squarespace web designer and strategist who's talking all about how to get more eyes on your website with SEO. Search Engine Optimization. This is basically how you get found on Google. As photographers we really need this. It should be something we're doing right from the start and she's going to break it down and tell us how to get more eyes on your website!

Why SEO Matters

SEO is like the "secret" language for Google. If you want to get clients from your website, you need to be able to speak that language and essentially play the game. And in this way Google is making sure that you're really a business. It's verifying that you're still in business and you're not a scam! When your site is properly optimized, Google rewards you. Your site levels up in the playing field and that gets you more eyes on your website. This is HUGE for photographers. You need something that will help you stand out from a crowd. A proper SEO does just that!

Must-Have Keywords

Keywords are what people are typing into Google. This is what your client is searching for. If you don't match those keywords or use them in your SEO then you're missing out on potential clients. There are some keywords that play a significant role in your business. Most people think if their business name is part of their logo that they don't need to include it... WRONG! Google needs you to tell us your business name. How else will people find you?! Including your personal name is helpful too! Just think, if a potential client is trying to find you without knowing your name they may end up finding someone else. As "smart" as google is you really need to make it clear. State your business, your full name (first and last) and say what you do! Are you a photographer? Google only knows what you put in writing!

Location, Location, Location

So we know keywords help our SEO significantly. But where do they go? It's not enough just to have the right words, but they need to be in the right places. Three of the big areas that you want to make sure you're inserting your keywords are in your headings, page descriptions and image names. A good practice is to have your h1 Heading at the top of each page to get the point across for that specific page. Maybe it's the main idea or purpose of that page. Then place keywords to describe your pages. On your services page, it could have an h1 Heading that says "legacy portraits for your family". Next would be in your image names. This helps your images pop up in Google image search - which gets more exposure! For example, instead of your photo being labeled "Robinson's family 198", name it something like "Dallas studio family portrait". Lastly, use these in page titles and descriptions. Really, it's the back end of your website.

Blogging Adds Value

In all our efforts to have a good SEO we still may be coming up short if we aren't active. Blogging is a perfect way to create more content about your service and topic of expertise. Blogging is basically a way to put more entries into the raffle. If you have keywords in the right places, you're still just using them in your page titles, images and description. So what adds the icing on top? Or how can you have extra places to use keywords? Blogging! It's amazing for SEO purposes, but also repurposing content to better serve your clients and create a better client experience for them. Again, this is how to get more eyes on your website!

More Resources

+ By Emily Jane

+ Free SEO Checklist

What We Discussed

Why SEO Matters (4:10)

Must-Have Keywords (8:31)

Headings, Page Descriptions, Image Names(12:12)

Blogging (21:24)

55. What It's Really Like Running A Business With My Husband

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 14 Feb 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Happy Valentines day friends! Seriously, how fun that we're doing this podcast on the holiday of love. It seems fitting to peel back the curtain and let you hear what it's really like running a business with my husband! I actually didn't think I would be doing this. We definitely didn't plan it! Before photography became our sole income, it was a hobby. Like many of you I just loved shooting, but today you'll get to hear how we got to this place (you know, what it's really like running a business with my husband)!

Before we go there, I have a FREE blueprint called $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint. It's a blueprint of how to make your first $3,000 from a single set of mini sessions! The reason I call it a blueprint is just like a house blueprint is used over and over again you can use this that way too! I've done enough minis now to know what works and what doesn't work. Grab this freebie and make your first $3k with ease!

Eggs in ONE basket

Daniel and I have always had separate jobs. Our last season we were both on staff at a church, but in different departments. I did photography on the side and loved what I was able to do. When we transitioned to photography full time we realized rather quickly that we were putting "all our eggs in this one basket"... yikes! If this failed we would feel it! The pressure for this to be successful mattered so much more because our entire income depended on it.

Now, it wasn't just us going out on a whim. We truly felt that God was leading us in this direction. So what do you do when you make all these plans for your future and it seems like God just comes in and interrupts? Well, for us we knew we had to be obedient! We went all in! While I am the face you all see. Daniel is the incredible man behind production. Basically all that you see and hear has his fingerprints on it. It's amazing how the very thing that scares you can be the biggest blessing in the long run!

FREEDOM

When you work for yourself you have this beautiful freedom to create your own schedule. We're able to travel and take time off. Our family has become our priority! Obviously, if we want this business to be successful it still requires effort, time and work. But, together we get to make it what we want. The structure for our lives has come from us, which is incredible! Something funny we discovered was the freedom in work hours. I am an early riser and enjoy getting my work done right away in the morning. My best work is done usually from 8am to about noon. Well, Daniel likes to have slow mornings and let everything really wake up blissfully. Right when I'm getting ready to crash is when he is getting started with a wide awake focus!

No, it's not perfect

Here's the thing, my husband and I are different as I'm sure many of you and your spouses are. I am very much the visionary and it's not uncommon for me to be thinking of new ideas to implement. I often process externally. Whereas Daniel, who is incredibly hard working and focused on excellence, didn't always get excited to brainstorm these new ideas. I had to learn to turn the business brain off. I needed to take the business hat off and put the wife hat on. There needs to be balance working together from home. When we can establish those "hats" it allows us to work effectively and efficiently. We can ask for deadlines and get things done, but also enjoy one another as husband and wife. This is what it's really like running a business with my husband. I wouldn't trade it for anything, but there are those challenges you have to navigate through.

Honestly, one of these days I'll have him join me, but for now he's chipping away at making this all look and sound good for you!

Links Mentioned

+ My $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint

What We Discussed

Eggs in one basket (7:19)

Freedom to travel (9:42)

Wearing different hats (11:56)

Schedules (13:24)

54. 5 Tips For Planning Spring Minis

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 07 Feb 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Guess what friends... Spring Minis are upon us! I am excited to kickstart this process and give you five tips for planning Spring Minis. Maybe you're in the midst of Valentine's Minis or haven't had the headspace to think that far in advance. But let me tell you, if you aren't prepping now you may miss the opportunity to hit a home run!

Before we get started I can't help but remind you, my largest course to date is OPEN right now! Profitable Minis 2.0 is only open twice a year and it's currently up for grabs. Oh and did I mention... it's 50% off! This course covers everything that you need to know to run profitable, fully booked mini sessions. The best part is it comes with a success guarantee. That means if you don't make your money back on your next major set of minis I'll refund 100%. Get the course, learn all the things and watch your mini sessions soar!

For those that have PMC 2.0 you know what a game changer it is and how it plays such a big role in preparing for those Spring Minis! So, today I'll be outlining 5 tips for planning Spring Minis. When is that season? Prime time is March, April, May.

Tip #1: Start Early

Seriously, you need to get after it. If you have't already get out and capture those promo shots. You want something to be able to show people for advertisement. Whether you're using a studio, a setup or going out to a location you need a photo to promote to the public! If you shot these last year then (yay!) you're a step ahead and can use promo shots from last year. I see this question a lot: "What do I use as a promo if I'm shooting a seasonal background for the first time?" So if you need promos but bluebonnets don't bloom until April use a stock photo. Don't steal a photo and definitely don't pay for one. Just find a free stock photo and use that along with a session you've done to showcase your style/work. Only do this for outdoor sessions that are seasonal. If you're able to get promo shots on location with the actual setup... do it!

Tip #2: Start Priming Your Audience

Don't wait to advertise when you're open for booking. You need to wet their appetite for what's ahead. This way you're building anticipation for when the "doors open" to book and you won't find yourself frustrated with a low interest rate. We do something special for our VIP list. This is a really great way to grow your email list from your social media. Advertise that your VIPs get priority access to booking minis! Meaning they can book their spot before it goes live to the public. How do you become a VIP? You join the mailing list! Post a question box on your Instagram stories and have people drop their email in. So easy and so rewarding! Priming is vital. Send out early emails letting people know what's coming and why they need to book. Address concerns or opposition. Kids change so much in 5 or 6 months. You can use these for birthday invites. Spring is a completely different season and you should mix up your family photos. These are all reasons clients are on the fence about getting Spring Minis when they just had Fall Minis.

Tip #3: Open to Your Email List First

This was part of the last one, but really you need reason behind why someone should join your email list. Words like VIP and priority access are trigger words for buyers. Everyone wants to be a step above and why shouldn't they when it comes to your business. The beauty in this is the longer you've grown your email list you eventually won't need to open to the public. VIPs will end up filling your time slots and they become your recurring ideal client!

Tip #4: Open One Date at a Time

Fill all your spots on that one date before opening a second. I know in your mind you want to give options to attract clients. But, this has a few advantages. For one, it's supply and demand. The more slots you have available the less in demand. The less slots you have available the more in demand! This allows you to control your schedule and not have holes. When we open to our VIPs we give access to all the dates. I only suggest doing this if you're confident you will fill both dates.

Tip #5: Advertise Until Booked

I know it can be easy to launch your minis and let the hype just kind of fall off. It takes the average person eight times seeing something before they take action. That means you've got to keep it in front of them through your email list, social media, all the marketing! I'm telling you, when you finally get tired of hearing about your mini sessions that's when people will hear it for the first time!

These 5 tips for planning Spring Minis skimmed the surface of some of the great content in the Profitable Minis 2.0 course! It's on sale right now for 50% off. You'll get access to over 15 hours of content including 67 lessons and modules covering my go to softwares like Flodesk, Dubsado and Shootproof. If you're serious about making a profit on your mini sessions you need this course!

Links Mentioned

+Profitable Mini Sessions 2.0

+Dubsado

+Flodesk

+Shootproof

What We Discussed

Start Early (3:11)

Prime Your Audience (6:03)

Open to Your Email List First (8:17)

Open One Date at a Time (10:01)

Advertise Until Booked (11:56)

53. Pricing Your Mini-Sessions

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 31 Jan 2022 06:00:00 -0500

We are yet again entering another season of Mini Sessions! I've seen lots of you doing Valentine Minis and I know we personally are gearing up for Spring Minis. Seriously, time is flying by! One of the questions I run into all the time is "How do I price my Mini Session?" In order for you to determine this you have to know your cost of doing business! So grab a pen and paper or pull out your notes on your phone! Everyone should be pricing your mini session to be profitable.

Before diving in, mark your calendars next week - I've got some live, FREE classes and would love to see you in there! The class is called BOOKED OUT MINIS. Tell your photog friends and join me! I'll do a Q&A at the end as well, so after listening to today's podcast if there are still some lingering questions you can ask away! I only do live classes twice a year and this class is brand new so you don't want to miss out. You can register for the class HERE!

Correct Mini Sessions Structure

The first mistakes I typically see photographers do is pricing their minis wrong or structuring their minis wrong. In order to accurately price your minis you need to be sure what you're offering is, in fact, a mini. My working definition is a short, 10 to 15 minute session with five images included. Remember, it's a limited number, we are not giving a full gallery. Mini sessions are on a date and at a location that you the photographer chooses. Mini sessions are not just short full sessions! If you have a 30 minute "mini session" that a client can book any time they want - that is not a true mini session. A Saturday time block you chose with a pre-set location determined by you is your mini session! (Off the soap box now haha) That is your structure. And that is where you see mini sessions be profitable!

Correct Mini Sessions Pricing

How do you know if you are pricing your mini session correctly? Do you just look around and try to match other photographers? Do you just throw a number out there? Here's how you break it down to know for sure that you are profiting on your minis! I love math, but I know not everyone here does. So, I'm going to break this down super simple and if you need to pause while making your calculations, do it!

Calculate Expenses

Go in and add up ALL your expenses in a single month. This includes your CRM (Client Management System), rentals or mini session sets, G suite if you have a custom domain, your emailing system (I use Flodesk and absolutely LOVE it - you can use my discount link HERE!)

Determine Your Hourly Rate

Here's the benefit of owning your own business - you determine things like this! Obviously, you need to be realistic, but do not pay yourself the same hourly rate as the student working at Costco. Give yourself the space to pay yourself appropriately for your time. The time you spend in your photography business is time spent away from the people that matter most in your life. So you want to be compensated appropriately for that time.

Calculate Number of Hours Spent

I would say a typical estimation (on the low end) is about 6x the number of hours you spend on the session. So, if you ran your mini sessions for 2 hours you multiply that by 6 and end up with 12 hours. The reason for this is because shooting the session is not the only work involved. There's the marketing, the client communication, the editing, the delivery, etc. This gives you a close estimation.

Cost of Doing Business

Listen in on the podcast to know how to plug in all these numbers. I am a firm believer that you shouldn't charge anything less than $150 for mini sessions. Once you do, you're getting into all the price shoppers and super difficult clients. Last week I did a podcast on How to Deal with Difficult Clients and although there is a way to handle them I'd rather not have to! When you price your mini sessions correctly you attract your more ideal client.

Pricing your mini session doesn't have to be difficult to determine. Use the equation, pay yourself adequately for the work spent away from loved ones and don't talk yourself down. It doesn't matter if you live in a small town or your city is oversaturated with photographers! When you recognize your worth so will others. Don't hesitate to reach out for help, I'm cheering you on!

Links Mentioned

+"How to Deal with Difficult Clients" Podcast

+Booked Out Minis FREE CLASS

+Flodesk

What We Discussed

Correct Minis Structure (2:38)

Calculate Your Expenses (4:51)

Determine Your Hourly Rate (6:24)

Calculate Your Number of Hours Spent (7:25)

The CODB Equation (8:53)

52. How To Respond To Difficult Clients

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 24 Jan 2022 06:00:00 -0500

It's inevitable, if you work in the photography business you've encountered a variety of clients. I will say the majority are amazing to work with, but there is the occasional difficult client. Whether they're just a bit "needy" or they want the extra communication or are just plain rude. We're going to cover how to respond to difficult clients when you're caught in these situations.

For those of you that are new or haven't checked out my FREE $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint. It's all about how to make $3000 in a single set of minis! I call it a blueprint because it's repeatable. My husband and I finished building our house a year ago now and the builders had a blueprint. There was a floor plan that other families used and we loved it. The builders were able to just follow the steps and build this house. That's the beauty of this freebie - you can keep reusing it! Hope you grab this resource and make the most of it!

Remove emotion from the situation

My associate team and I have had people asking or demanding for raw images. Have you ever been there? I'm sure you have. We've had clients that are really enjoyed the over communication. For example, they would email and text all the things constantly and if we didn't reply immediately then they were frustrated. As a business we have boundaries in place to keep my team healthy. We try setting office hours and have autoresponders. Regardless, it seems there are always 1 or 2 clients that threaten a bad review. This hasn't happened often so don't stress! My associate team shoots in such high volume there are bound to be a few tricky situations. So how do you respond to difficult clients?

Here's something to remember: odds are the person isn't coming after you personally. I know our work feels like an extension of ourselves, but remember to clients, most of the time they only see the work. The problem may be in or out of your control, so removing yourself emotionally will help tremendously! When you get that uncomfortable text or email - pause. Take a breath and give yourself some space. Another thing I'll do is write my response and have someone look it over. This way if there is some emotion peeking through someone else can spot it.

Always refer back to your contract

Contracts are here to protect you! Don't try arguing back and forth. You should be using a contract for every single session. It doesn't matter if it's a full session or mini session of family, friends or strangers. If you don't have a contract I have one called Portrait Contract Template. It was approved by a lawyer so everything inside it legit. It covers you and your clients and is customizable so you can reuse it for every and any session! So when you have a dispute about raw images or delivery time you can refer to the contract that they signed!

Speak with confidence and hold your ground

Never let anyone bully you or threaten taking you to court. Use your contract and be firm. You can still be kind while being firm. The more confidence you use and holding your ground the more likely they are to let it go. Some clients are going to fight just to fight. If you have things in place that they've signed off on you can hold that to them. I know this is much easier said than done, but when you're doing things right it's easier to stand up for yourself!

Compromise to avoid bad reviews

Keep in mind, most people that threaten to write a bad review won't actually write it. They're trying to use that as leverage to win in those situations. What kind of compromise can you come up with? Are they asking for a refund on their session? Issue the refund even if your contract says the retainer was non-refundable. Sometimes it's worth refunding to avoid getting into it. Truly this is a judgement call. You can stick to your contract and be very black and white or you can have some leniency to win someone over.

You can recover after a bad review

For starters, reply to the review! If people are searching and see a bad review they will also see your side of the story. State the facts, be professional and make things clear. Your response will show you care and that the review is most likely... crazy! After you reply you need to block the person from your business page. You don't want to leave room for a back and forth. You should already be having conversations via email so there's no reason to publicize it.

Overall, stay professional, be concise, and be clear in your communication! Keep your emotion out of it so that you're responding in the best ways that you can. Ultimately, you get to choose how you respond to difficult clients. I hope these tips help and be sure to check out the links mentioned below!

Links Mentioned

+ My $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint

+Portrait Contract Template

What We Discussed

Remove emotion from the situation (8:14)

Always refer back to your contract (10:22)

Speak with confidence and hold your ground (12:55)

Compromise to avoid bad reviews (14:18)

You can recover after a bad review (15:29)

51. How Copywriting Helps Your Bottom Line with Rachel Greiman

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 17 Jan 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Are you ready to dive into all things COPY?! Honestly for whatever reason family photographers seem to be behind when it comes to writing solid copy. Today I've got Rachel Greiman, who is the founder of Greenchair Stories helping us really break down copy! Here's what I love - she was a family photographer! Who better to give us insight on writing solid copy for family photographers than a copywriter who was one!?

In order for you to really grasp this, it's important you know what copy is and what it is not. A lot of people categorize copy as all the words. But not every word is created equal. There is a difference between copy, content and messaging. Here's the breakdown...

The difference between copy, content and messaging

Copy is the words you use to sell. What you see in advertisement anywhere in the world - that's copy. It is what you see in a magazine ad or on a billboard. Copy speaks to the buyer. It is strategic and has a definite message. It's the most important in your business because you're talking to your ideal client through this information!

Content is what you write to warm up your audience. It is blog and social media posts. It's your newsletter. Content words are educational and creative. They are intended to engage your audience further into your business. What you're reading right now is content!

Messaging is a crucial "root" to both content and copy. You always start with messaging. Who are you reaching? Who are you talking to? How can you get really specific about who that person is, what their desires are, what their problems are, what their questions and hesitations are. From there you can write incredible copy and content!

Think, one reader

Define who your ideal client is. Once that's determined you can start writing solid copy and content with them in mind. Essentially your website becomes a love letter written just to them. Some are afraid of getting specific in their copy because they think they're alienating business. The truth is you end up attracting more people similar to your ideal client. This turns your ideal client into clients - plural! If you're trying to be a jack of all trades - weddings, seniors, newborn, family, etc. - you end up being a master at none.

I can remember the day I made the decision to just be a family photographer. I was so nervous to push the publish page on my website! It meant I would have to say no to things. But here's the thing, my no to other things made my YES stand out. And wow did that pay off!

When should you hire a copywriter?

It's really important to own your message in the beginning. You should be in control of it before you invest thousands of dollars in a copywriter. It's similar to hiring an editor. You can't hire someone to edit your photos until you know your style! If you're unsure of your message you don't want someone else writing it. Figure out who your heart beats for.

Then on the flip-side if you keep getting inquiries from the "wrong" clients it may be because your copy is directed to the "wrong" clients. When you know who your one reader is you can really hone in. It may be time for you to change your copy or get help with writing it.

I hope this helps you navigate and even determine where you're at! Define your ideal client, allow yourself to say no, don't try being everything to everyone. You can be a master at what you do and clients will seek you out knowing you specialize in what they want.

Checkout Rachel Greiman:

Green Chair Stories

https://www.instagram.com/greenchairstories/

What We Discussed

The difference between copy, content and messaging (3:24)

Finding your one reader (5:53)

When to hire (16:13)

50. Should You Use Facebook Ads In 2022?

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 10 Jan 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Today we get to talk about my absolute favorite topic ever - Facebook ads! I mean typically, you either love them or you hate them. I just happen be that friend that everyone runs to for facebook ad info. Seriously they are a hot topic if you think about marketing or advertising at all. It's a fresh year and a great time to really start thinking how you can up your game by getting your name out there. Facebook ads don't have to be scary or pricey if you know what you're doing. I so don't mind being your friend that overshares about how to do this today!

Before jumping in, I've got a FREE blueprint for all of you. In case you didn't know, I am a believer of the mini session. They truly are my bread and butter. I've experimented long enough now to tell you all the do's and don'ts. My $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint walks you through how to make $3,000 on your next mini sessions. If you've hit that goal or not this step by step guide is sure to be an amazing resource!

Yes, you should use Facebook Ads!

It seems like this becomes a teeter totter decision. I know last year we were all hit with the new IOS update. If you didn't hear, basically, the iPhone's iOS update took on privacy measures that allowed you to opt out of tracking. The kind that tracked what websites you visit and what things you're interested in. For instance, if I googled something like "kid's plates" then all of a sudden I started seeing these Facebook ads for kid's plates! It's wild. After the update (if you opted out) you no longer were "tracked". All that being said it was great for users, but made it difficult for people that utilized Facebook ads.

Here's the good part: I stayed the course through this whole change and still use Facebook ads as my primary source of leads. The changes I noticed heavily impacted the analytics reporting. So it shouldn't scare you away. I would advise, however, if you've never done Facebook ads before to get educated. The world of Facebook is a world of its own. There is a right and wrong way to do them. My hope is to give you a framework as to why you should use them in 2022 for your business! So here's why:

#1 Facebook has turned into a "pay to play" game

A year and a half ago I posted in facebook groups for free and still believe in that method of advertising. But, friend, the game is changing. Now algorithms make it difficult for your post to be seen. Not impossible! In fact, if you're in my course: Profitable Mini Sessions you know there are ways to play the algorithm to be sure your posts are seen. Overall, Facebook has leaned into the platform people that pay to get their ads seen. I view my paid advertising as an investment in my business. Don't pay if you don't get a return!

#2 Facebook ads make it easy to reach a cold audience

Cold audiences are people you've never reached before while a warm audience is people you have. The easiest way to reach your warm audience is through your email list. Hands down. Facebook ads, in my opinion are the easiest way to reach your cold audience. Rather than fighting algorithms you can put in a little money and basically have them do the work for you! Here's the golden ticket: You're paying for Facebook to find your leads. You're not "making the cold call". Facebook will find those that would be interested in your ad!

#3 You can get specific in your targeting

Yes, it's honestly creepy how accurately it targets people. You can target based on demographics, income level, interests, cities, etc. This really is why it was incredible to use Facebook ads for my associate team. We could choose specific areas to target. Seriously, technology is genius. Now you can put out an ad that literally searches for your exact ideal client!

#4 Facebook ads are a lead machine

This is what we saw with my associate team. You can constantly have ads running. Facebook doing the marketing for you. This way you're not having to exhaust yourself with the posting in groups, responding to people, commenting on posts, and messaging and all the things! It saves time and energy! YAY! Not to mention you can set up automations for getting them booked. So it really streamlines the process.

Facebook ads aren't for everyone, but I am a Facebook ad freak! I've seen it work wonders in my industry and believe it could help. If you're stuck, reach out to me. I'd love to share my knowledge!

Links Mentioned

+ My $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint

What We Discussed

Facebook is a pay to play game (8:03)

Facebook ads make it easy to reach a cold audience (11:48)

You can get specific in your targeting (13:33)

Facebook ads are a lead generating machine (16:35)

49. What Healthy Hustle Looks Like

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 03 Jan 2022 06:00:00 -0500

Can you believe it's 2022?! We're sharing our first podcast episode of the year - and I can't believe it's actually happening. I'm so excited about today's episode because we're really diving into what healthy hustle looks like in our businesses. I don't know about you, but for us, the fall was just crazy busy. As we come out of such a busy season and have the chance to slow down, it's the perfect time to reflect on what's been going on, what's working and what's not.

But, before I get int all that… I want to share my new FREE guide with you: My $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint. It’s a step-by-step guide of what to do to make $3,000 on your next mini sessions. Whether you’ve hit that goal before or just want to see if there’s other ideas to try, grab this free guide. It’s jam packed with tons of great information for you!

The Healthy Hustle

The word "hustle" has become somewhat of a buzzword in the creative industry. It's means a lot of things to all of us - some good and some bad. During the height of our busy season, I was talking with my mastermind girls about what it looked like for them. It really sparked this episode. But, anyway. I'm a huge advocate of working from a place of rest, not one of hustling, so it's really interesting to think about the seasons in which hustling is more appropriate for us. If you ask me, there's 100% a wrong and right way (and time) to hustle for our businesses. I don't want you getting caught up in the idea of hustling to get things done to the point that you're broken when all of its' over. So let's walk through how to create a healthy hustle in your business.

What makes a "healthy" hustle?

There's three main indicators that your hustling isn't healthy. The first one is boundaries. A healthy hustle has boundaries. You have to decide what your non-negotiable are and stick by them while you're in these seasons of hustling towards your goal. These could be things like putting your kids to bed, having a family dinner each night, or always leaving a day open for a family day. Whatever it is: decide on it at the start. If you try to change your ways mid-way through the busy season, you're going to have such a hard time. Trust me on that one!

The second thing is that you need to be taking care of yourself. Even in the midst of your busiest season, take care of you. Your self-care might look different, but it's still important. And seriously, sometimes just the extra five minutes sitting in the car at night is totally self-care! Self-care isn't always about massages and nail salons. Sometimes it's just turning off work when you said you would - or lighting a candle and reading. Whatever it is for you, make sure you do it.

Finally, work hard but only hustle for a season. Like I mentioned, I'm all about working from a place of rest. I truly believe that hustling comes in seasons. It shouldn't be your only mode of existing. Having a set end date (for example, not taking any sessions in December after a long fall) brings so much hope and comfort. Your seasons may look different, but try to remember that they're just seasons and should ONLY be seasons. Not all the time.

How do you know if you're hustling in an unhealthy way?

So I wanted to give you kind of a framework of how to know if you're hustling well or if you're hustling in an unhealthy way. So here is some kind of lenses to look through when you're looking at your hustle: if you are hustling and you're feeling like you want to quit or you're feeling like you're at your breaking point or you're so exhausted that you wonder if your clients are even worth it, then that is not healthy. Healthy Hustle does not leave you wanting to quit or just dreading working every single day. A Healthy Hustle leaves you reassured, knowing that your clients are being served well. I want more than anything for you to feel prepared for busy season and really in your heart to know that you're going to hustle well. So if you need that accountability, you need that encouragement, whatever it is, reach out to me. I want to help!

Links Mentioned

+ My $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint

What We Discussed

The Healthy Hustle

What makes it healthy

How to know if you're in an unhealthy hustle season

48. How I'm Prepping For Q1 of 2022

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 27 Dec 2021 07:00:00 -0500

Welcome back to our LAST episode of the Business Journey podcast for 2021! Today, we're talking about how I prepare for the Q1 of 2022! I seriously cannot believe that it's almost 2022. How is that possible? I know I've said that the last few episodes, but it really is true. I hope that this episode inspires you and helps you feel more prepared for the start of the year!

Really quick... one other way to be prepared for the start of the new year is to check out my $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint. It’s a step-by-step guide of what to do to make $3,000 on your next mini sessions. Whether you’ve hit that goal before or just want to see if there’s other ideas to try, grab this free guide. It will help you plan your minis for next year with even more confidence! Now back to Q1 planning!

Prepping for Q1 of 2022

When we talk about the first quarter of the year, I mean January, February and most of March. It's a slower season for most family photographers and it's a great time to be strategic about the work that you're doing. I want to share everything I do to prepare for the new year with you. It's easy to get caught up in just resting since we all survived the holidays and busy season, but I want to encourage you to use this time wisely.

Start with an overview of the year.

The first thing I do is get my huge 2022 wall calendar from Kat Schmoyer printed and put on my wall. Get yours here - Kat’s Quarterly Calendars! This allows me to look at the year as a whole. I get mine printed at Staples and then get it up on my office wall, but you could use it online too! Once it's up, I begin to fill it in. I always start with family tings - birthdays, our vacations, and anything we've committed to as a family. Next, I add what I may have committed to for the business - conferences, speaking engagements, travel. And from there, I decide on some mini session dates for the spring!

Look at your parking lot.

Once my calendar is setup, I look at what I call my "business parking lot" (thanks Kat!). This is a place where I put ideas that need to be done or I want to do but don't have the space for in that moment. These might be things like updating my website portfolio, my client guide, or whatever. So during this slower season at the start of the year, I pick out a few of these projects and decide when I'm going to do them. It's a great time to evaluate the blogs that you might want to do. And I always encourage you to review our workflows and automations in this season, too! Take the time to decide on projects you can focus on now - like Pinterest. PS - want more help with Pinterest? Check out our Behind the Lens masterclass on that!

Get out my Powersheets.

The third and final thing I do is plan out my Q1 goals with the help of Lara Casey's Powersheets. PowerSheets aren't planners, but they're systems to help you define your goals. This allows me to look at yearly and quarterly goals. I like using Kat's Quarterly Calendar to lay out the focus once I know my goals. They might be something simple like just nailing down spring mini dates, then it's also doing promo shots, and all of the steps in our Mini Sessions Playbook. Those all become goals for that month in Q1!

I hope these three steps help you think about how you want to prepare for Q1 this year! I don't know about you but we had a crazy busy fall season and I'm excited to slow down, reset, and regroup going into the new year! Take advantage of your slow season and get ahead for 2022! I believe in you!

47. Your Top 5 Favorite Episodes of 2021

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 20 Dec 2021 06:00:00 -0500

As we get closer to the end of the year, I thought it might be fun to recap your top five episodes of the Business Journey Podcast. It's been a great year and I'm still blown away by all of the support for the podcast! So, thank you for that. I can't believe we've been doing this for almost a year and providing you with more educational content through our podcast than ever before. Our team thought recapping these five episodes would be a great time!

#5: Blogging for Family Photographers with Kristina Dowler, Episode 34

Kristina is a member of our team - our content writer. When she took over our blogging, it was a huge sigh of relief because we knew everything would be optimized, well-written, and we'd be sharing our content and beautiful photos easily. In Episode 34, she walked us through what family photographers should be doing when they blog. It's a super practical episode for all of you photographers!

#4: Instagram Reels with Natasha Coyle & Stephanie Kase, Episode 9

This was a super fun episode! Both Natasha and Stephanie are just amazing humans but they're also great at short form videos like Instagram Reels and Tik Toks. Their episode helped so many of us break down some of the mental barriers we have around Instagram Reels. They had great tips and tricks, especially about batching Reels and it made everything feel reasonable. This is definitely a must-listen if you're struggling with short form video!

#3: How to Book Mini Sessions with No Client Base, Episode 20

I LOVE that you all loved Episode 20 because I think it can be a real concern for so many photographers. Mini sessions are my jam and so I loved breaking down so many strategies on the podcast all year long. But, when I first started doing minis I had almost no client base, so I walk you through my strategies to book out your mini sessions, even if you've got no clients currently. As we get ready for a new year, it's worth a listen. I hope it encourages you to give those sessions a shot this year!

#2: Preparing for Spring Minis, Episode 2

I'm so happy that one of my earliest podcasts became one of the most popular ones! Episode 2 was a super fun one to record, too. We put it out right before spring mini sessions hit and we were able to help so many photographers get ahead of the curve. We broke down a few easy things to do to make your mini sessions in the spring a success. And honestly, you can use the tips any time of year so go take a listen to that!

And now, drumroll please....

#1: Family Posing Secrets, Episode 6

I LOVE that family posing was the topic you all loved most of all this year on the podcast! I know that posing can be a tricky thing for family photographers and I've always wished there were more resources for photographers on it. A side note - we started a YouTube channel this year and I've done some videos on this topic, too! Anyway - I'm glad to know you love all things posing and this episode is a great start!

If you missed any of these episodes, I hope you have the chance to listen to them! Thanks for making 2021 such a great year. I'm so happy that I've had the chance to get to know so many of you and work with you all!

Oh! Don't forget... if you haven't downloaded it already, I want to share my FREE guide with you: My $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint. It’s a step-by-step guide of what to do to make $3,000 on your next mini sessions. Whether you’ve hit that goal before or just want to see if there’s other ideas to try, grab this free guide. I hope it helps you reach new goals with your mini sessions.

Links Mentioned

+ My $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint

+Blogging for Family Photographers, Episode 34

+Instagram Reels, Episode 9

+Book Minis with No Clients, Episode 20

+Prepping for Spring Mini Sessions, Episode 2

+Posing for Family Photographers, Episode 6

+YouTube Channel

What We Discussed

+Blogging for Family Photographers (3:26)

+Instagram Reels (5:15)

+Book Minis with No Clients (7:15)

+Prepping for Spring Mini Sessions (9:05)

+Posing for Family Photographers (11:06)

46. A Look Back: 2021 Case Study of My Business (Part 2)

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 13 Dec 2021 06:00:00 -0500

I’m so excited to finish up my Case Study of 2021 with you today! Last week, I talked about my accidental discovery - building an associate team. For this episode, we’re going to talk about how going full-time in my business went in 2021. This year, Daniel and I both went full-time in the business while raising two toddlers and moving to a new city. To say it was a lot is definitely an understatement. But we had a great year and I'm excited to share more with you!

Going Full-Time

Now, onto the good stuff! When we moved to Nashville, Daniel (my husband) and I both went full-time in the business. I always thought I would stay part-time and keep my church job, but when our move happened… us going full-time kind of did too. And it turned out to be such a blessing: one we didn’t even know we wanted. It has been an incredible season to live in, with the freedom and flexibility to travel and do what we want. I’d be lying if I said there wasn’t an adjustment period, though.

Finding a Routine

Before this, we’d had our kids in daycare since we were both working. Now, they were suddenly at home with us. And at the start of our move to Nashville, we were living in a townhouse. It was definitely cramped! Daniel and I would take turns being with the kids while the other worked, but it just… wasn’t working for our family. So, pretty early on, I decided to set specific work hours. I know that I’m a morning person and am pretty much useless by the afternoon, so I determined Monday, Wednesday and Fridays from 8-12 would be my work time. Whatever I couldn’t get done in that time, I outsourced.

However, our kids were going to a drop-in daycare during this time. And it was wasting our time - we’d spend almost an hour round trip driving to get our day started. So that was pretty tough. But I knew right away, the set hours were HUGE for me. I was being responsible with my time and it helped me plan ahead. Once we moved to the new house, we kept up the daycare for a bit longer before we decided to look at hiring a nanny. It turned out to be the BEST decision. My kids were happy. I could work and step out and be with them when I had time. We finally found our rhythm!

More Travel!

The other big change that came with both Daniel and I going full-time was our travel schedule. We kind of went a little crazy, I think. We were so excited because we just couldn’t travel before with our jobs. Now, all of a sudden, we were traveling a lot. We managed to photograph a lot of sessions and document them for Behind the Lens, my membership for photographers. But, it was a LOT of traveling in a little time. We quickly realized that we needed to be more intentional and give ourselves breaks when it came to traveling. That's a change we're making for 2022!!

Learning to Work Together

We’ve also had to learn how to work together. Not only work together but run the business together. WE’ve had to learn to set boundaries for family time and work time, as well as how we communicate about it all. I learned pretty quickly that I can’t turn off the business stuff. I’d be making dinner and talking about it all and he’d have to remind me I could stop. I’ve really learned how to leave it in my office and get better at outsourcing because of that! He’s also helped me come to terms with the fact that I need hard deadlines to complete work. If I don’t have those, I wind up holding up the whole team and no one wants that! Together, we’ve learned so much and I wouldn’t trade it for the world now.

It’s been an awesome year. Overall, I've been just really pleased with how things have gone and we've learned so much and we're really, really excited for what next year has in store. I hope your year is ending well and you’re excited for 2022, too!!

Links Mentioned

+ My $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint

+Behind the Lens Membership

What We Discussed

Life in Nashville (2:17)

Finding a Routine (4:00)

Traveling More (9:04)

Learning to Work Together (10:45)

45. A Look Back: 2021 Case Study of My Business (Part 1)

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 06 Dec 2021 06:00:00 -0500

This time of year is so special because everyone’s looking back on the year and reflecting about what’s happened in the past 12 months. And so are we! For the next two episodes of the Business Journey Podcast, I’m doing a case study of my business in 2021. These episodes will be a little bit different than what we’ve discussed before, but I hope it inspires you to take a look back at your own year and celebrate how far you’ve come!

Before we dive into all of that though, I want to share my new FREE guide with you: My $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint. It’s a step-by-step guide of what to do to make $3,000 on your next mini sessions. Whether you’ve hit that goal before or just want to see if there’s other ideas to try, grab this free guide. It’s jam packed with tons of great information for you!

My 2021 Case Study

One of my team members suggested this case study and I have to admit I think it’s a fun idea. 2021 has been a huge year for us personally and professionally, so I think it will be fun to reflect on it all. Perhaps the biggest change for our family was moving to Nashville last November. This has been our first full year living in Nashville and being away from our families. We’ve grown our business living here. I know so many of you wonder about starting your business, or growing your business, when you’re living somewhere new. So I hope this breakdown is helpful for you!

What Life is Like in Nashville

So my family and I moved to Nashville in November, while we built a house that wouldn’t be done until March. So in between, we were living in a townhouse. The first part of the year definitely felt cramped for space. It was an interesting season for us: two working adults and two toddlers in a small house. But we made it work. This was also the first season I was away from my long-standing clients in Dallas, so I had to figure that out at the same time. We managed to make two trips back to Dallas to capture mini sessions. It was kind of scary because when you book tickets like that, you can’t really change dates easily! So we had to commit to those big trips. It was around this time that I realized despite wanting to serve these clients, I couldn’t physically do it myself. That’s when our associate team came into play.

I didn't want to turn families away who wanted photos! So, we discussed building an associate team in Dallas. If you're not familiar with what an associate photographer is, basically it's somebody that you hire and train as a photographer to shoot under your brand. The main photograph handles the marketing and client communication, editing, and delivery but the photographer is a team member. It was super helpful in the busy seasons to have more “me’s” running around taking portraits. Around this time, I also hired my first full-time employee, Bonnie. She’s in Dallas and I knew I wanted to teach her to shoot like me, so she became my first associate photographer. We quickly realized that we were going to have a super busy spring and were going to need more photographers, so in March, I actually separated my associate shooters into their own brand: Wisp & Willow Photography.

Building a New Brand

In literally 24 hours, we put together their online pages, CRM systems, pricing, and brand. It was crazy. I just showed up on Monday and told the rest of my team we had a new brand. It was seriously a whirlwind but it worked out in the best way possible. Because we separated the brands, we could clearly market to families in the areas we had associates for - and it was such a good decision. Before long, we had the entire spring booked out for our small team. And that’s when I started to realize that this accidental discovery was one of the best things I could have done for my business.

We fully expected things to slow in the summer, but they didn’t. Clients were booking the associate team for full sessions - maternity, newborns, extended family sessions… and it never stopped. When the fall came, we knew we wanted to offer fall mini sessions for the team, too. It was around this time that we realized that we may want to consider expanding the team into other cities. We began building a team in Nashville, in Houston, and just kept booking. With more Facebook ads, we were able to reach new audiences easily and keep our schedules full! In the height of the busy season, we had 12 photographers going. I mean, how crazy is that?! All from this accidental team. What a happy accident!

Lessons Learned from Building an Associate Team

Building an associate team - creating more of ME - has been such a blessing. But I want to be clear: we aren’t doing it alone. One of the other things we did right away for the associates was outsource their editing, too. Because of the extra help, we’ve been able to keep up with demand. It’s been incredible to be able to serve these clients who I wouldn’t be able to physically serve otherwise! Although building this associate team has been a whirlwind, we’ve learned so much and I wouldn’t have learned any other way!

Going into next year, we’re excited to help our associate team grow with more intention. We’ve learned from the mistakes we’ve made this year and can’t wait to implement better workflows, communication, and team experiences. It’s exciting - we have no idea what the future will look like but, we know it’s going to be great! Tune in next week to hear more about my transition to full time in 2021 and how that looked with my family at home, too!

Links Mentioned

+ My $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint

+Wisp & Willow Photography

What We Discussed

Introduction (2:13)

Moving to Nashville (2:35)

Associate Team Start (5:20)

Building a New Brand (8:37)

It kept going... (12:19)

Lessons Learned (17:15)

44. How I Set Goals In My Business

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 29 Nov 2021 06:00:00 -0500

As we get closer and closer to the end of the year, "goal setting" becomes a popular buzzword in the creative industry (and beyond). I'm a huge fan of goals so I wanted to share how I set goals in my business each year. Whether you love goals like me or would rather not set something, join me on this week's episode. These tips might surprise you!

But, before we dive into all of that though, I want to share my new FREE guide with you: My $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint. It’s a step-by-step guide of what to do to make $3,000 on your next mini sessions. Whether you’ve hit that goal before or just want to see if there’s other ideas to try, grab this free guide. It’s jam packed with tons of great information for you! Now let's jump back to goal setting for your business!

How I Set Goals in My Business

Like I said before, I'm a goal person. I'm an Enneagram 3 and I just love setting goals because of it. Checking off lists makes me happy and I think that kind of is the same thing for goals! So today, I wanted to give you an inside look at how I set goals in my business each year. So let's dive into it!

The Tools I Use for Goal Setting

Each year, I set yearly goals which are 2 or 3 overarching goals I have for that year. Then I also set quarterly goals. I do that each quarter at a time. So, I'll set my yearly goals and Q1 goals in January. There's prep work involved in setting goals. You don't just sit down and decide what to do. Look at what's been happening, what worked well and what didn't. I love the system that Lara Casey teaches with her PowerSheets! They break down the whole process so it's less overwhelming and I truly do see results year after year.

In addition to PowerSheets, I use Kat Schmoyer's printable calendars. She has a quarterly printable calendar and I love printing it, framing it, and using my dry erase markers on it each quarter. I think it really helps me break down my quarterly goal into smaller, reasonable chunks of focus. PS. We did a whole interview about how to plan quarterly for your business - make sure you take a look, she's literally the Calendar Queen! When I sit down and go through my goals, I make sure to update everything at once so I'm ready to start tackling goals.

How to Set Your Goals

When it comes to actually setting goals, I use a system called SMART goals. It stands for smart, measurable, attainable, relevant, and time-based goals. These are the lenses I look through when setting my goals each year and quarter. Basically, you want to make sure that the goals you set actually matter for your business and are measurable - this will vary goal to goal. But you want to make sure that you can actually SEE progress. Remember your season of life while planning your goals, too. That's something I think many of us forget. Attainable and realistic mean two different things depending on your season of life. And remember, you can always refresh or change your goals too!

One of the biggest lessons I've learned about goal setting is to be flexible. Each quarter, I take a look at what happened and what's ahead. This helps me refresh my goals. You shouldn't feel like you're stuck with the same goals all year long. It's actually why I don't like New Year's resolutions - they aren't flexible! Be flexible and kind to yourself.

That's a quick overview of how I set goals each year and quarter! I want to hear what goals you've set and how you lay them out for yourself! Are you using Power Sheets or a calendar? Or just a list somewhere? Now is the perfect time to sit down and decide what's on your goal list for 2022! What do you want to feel this time next year and how are you going to get there? You've got this!!!

Links Mentioned

+ My $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint

+PowerSheets and Accessories

+Kat's Quarterly Calendars

What We Discussed

Tools I Use (2:10)

SMART Goals (5:55)

43. Tips For Taking Time Off In Your Business

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 22 Nov 2021 06:00:00 -0500

Happy Monday! With Thanksgiving ahead of us this week and the winter holidays not far off, I'm so excited for today's podcast episode. We're talking all about taking time off in your business! I completely believe in taking time away from your business in a healthy and positive way, so I can't wait to dive into my top tips for making that happen. This episode is inspired by my team, actually! The entire time is taking the majority of December off to enjoy the last few weeks of the year and I'm so happy for all of us! So, I wanted to share some tips for taking time off in your business. But... before we get into that, I want to remind you about something!

I want to share my new FREE guide with you: My $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint. It’s a step-by-step guide of what to do to make $3,000 on your next mini sessions… all on ONE date. Whether you’ve hit that goal before or just want to see if there’s other ideas to try, grab this free guide. It’s jam packed with tons of great information for you! Now that you've got that downloaded, let's head back to talking about time off!

Tips for Taking Time Off in Your Business

My goal for the team is that we can be completely off - or only popping into the inbox once a week. We seriously want to limit our time working over the holiday season. It's been a huge goal of mine for this to be a possibility and I'm SO happy to say we're there. There's a few practical ways we've accomplished this!

Outline your Boundaries!

Whether you're having this conversation with a team member or yourself, ask what does time off look like for you? For us, it was that the last 3 weeks of December, we'd be out of office. Someone will look in our inbox but ONLY respond if it's an emergency. Otherwise, it can wait. I don't want my team in the business every single day. We aren't taking any sessions this month and those are some of the big boundaries we've set for our time off. Decide what yours look like. Maybe it's taking 3 solid weeks off or just certain days. And on the days off, what are you going to do or not do in your business? Once you know what your boundaries are, you can take steps to protect that time.

Set an autoresponder in your email.

One easy way to protect your boundaries is to set a digital reminder through an autoresponder. I know people love to hate on autoresponders but I'm a big fan of them. They easily protect your boundaries and help set expectations for anyone contacting you. Make it clear you're out of office and will respond when you're back in - unless it's an emergency. It gives your clients or students peace of mind to know they reached you at the very least - and they'll hear back soon.

Get ahead on content and/or work!

The third thing you can to do to take extended time off is getting ahead on your work and content. You need to plan ahead so that you're not scrambling the week before you go out to publish content. You still want to stay consistent and be in the front of people's minds - so schedule ahead. Spend time batching your content so you can knock it all out. Then you can pre-schedule your social media posts and not have to worry about it while you're off!

Bonus Tip: Hire help!

If you're really anxious about taking time off, consider hiring a subcontractor who could check in on things for you! They would be in charge of putting out fires that pop up while you're out of the office. This isn't necessary but if it helps you feel more relief and comfortable with time off, do it! If you're in the place to make this happen, I encourage you to if you need it. And if you aren't, know that is truly NOT a big deal!

It's easy to feel like we can't step away or the business will crumble. But I'm here to give you permission to take a step back. Set boundaries you're comfortable with and give yourself that freedom to rest going into the new year. I know it can feel scary and like you're going to miss out on something big, but the right people will wait and respect the fact that you're taking care of yourself. Running a business isn't about working non-stop. It's about building a life you love! I hope these tips for taking time off help you realize it IS possible to run a successful business without being burnt out.

Links Mentioned

+ My $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint

What We Discussed

Outline boundaries (3:10)

Set an autoresponder (5:12)

Get ahead on content (7:10)

Bonus tip: hire help! (9:28)

42. Building A Team: A Conversation With My Integrator

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 15 Nov 2021 06:00:00 -0500

For the last few weeks, we've been diving into how to prepare for and build a team for your business. Today, I'm excited to be chatting with my integrator, Kat Schmoyer, about having someone in this position on your team. Ever since we started working together, we've both gotten a ton of questions about what her role is, how to know if you need one too, and so many other topics. So, we decided to sit down and pull back the curtain on what it's like working together with Kat as my integrator!

In today’s episode about hiring an integrator, we’ll be talking about:

Meet Kat (2:10)
What is an integrator (4:36)
Why operating in your zone of genius matters (7:06)
What Kat's role looks like day-to-day on the team (10:03)
How Kat helps me decide which dreams to follow (13:23)
When are you ready to bring on an someone like Kat (16:27)
What you can do to prepare yourself for an integrator (22:15)
How being a visionary has been for Rebecca (29:03)

Thank you, Kat!

If you want to learn more about Kat and her incredible services, make sure to check out her website HERE! She has several blogs about being an integrator and what that means for your business too, so go take a look. You can also find her on Instagram.

Links Mentioned in the Episode:

+ Kat's Website

+ Visionary / Integrator Quiz

41. Building A Team: Bringing On Full-Time Employees

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 08 Nov 2021 06:00:00 -0500

This week, we've got another great episode about the next step in building a team: bringing on full time employees. Before you run away, hear me out! Although I know you may not be in the place to be making these hires right now, you will be one day. And setting up a strong foundation now will make all the difference when you are ready to start making those hires! Last week, we talked about how to prep for building a team, so I think this is another great foundational piece you need when building the team of your dreams!

Before we dive into all of that though, I want to share my new FREE guide with you: My $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint . It's a step-by-step guide of what to do to make $3,000 on your next mini sessions... all on ONE date. Whether you've hit that goal before or just want to see if there's other ideas to try, grab this free guide. It's jam packed with tons of great information for you! And now... back to our topic of the day: bringing on full time employees!

How do you know if you're ready?

It can be tricky to know if you're ready to hire someone full-time. But, a good rule of thumb is to look at who you have working with you already. If you've got a few subcontractors working for you (maybe your editor, virtual assistant, and social media manager) but you're still ready to continue scaling, it might be time to consider a full time hire. While you have these other people working under you and you realize you could afford to bring someone on for 40 hours a week, you might also be in the position to consider that hire. I recommend having 3-6 months of that person's salary in the bank before you commit to anyone though, so that if something happens, you're protected! It's not just for me: it's for them. I want them to know that I'm taking the responsibility of hiring them seriously and I want them to feel secure in their choice to work with a small business. So to me, that's the first step of knowing you're ready to hire someone full time!

Who do you hire?

There's two places to hire from: IN the industry and OUTSIDE of the industry. There's pros and cons to both. When you hire within the industry, you have someone that's more likely to be familiar with the software and systems you use. That's definitely a plus! But, there's something to be said for training someone from the ground up. In my business, we've hired three other people beyond my husband who are full-time and we've trained every single one of them. For us, it made sense because we have really specific processes we want to use and want them to know. Not to mention, our employees are amazing and super smart so it didn't take long to train them! Additionally, when you hire someone who isn't the expert in what they do, it's a little bit cheaper. Again, you have to train and teach them, but for us, that made more sense.

Now, if you're wondering where to go to find these amazing people, make sure you join Behind the Lens and watch my masterclass on Outsourcing! I share all sorts of tips, including where I go to find the amazing team members I have!

What do you look for when you hire?

For me, I've always hired for personality and trained for skill. It's more important that I find the RIGHT people for my team. Teaching them to do a job is easy! We're big on knowing our team members strengths and weaknesses here, and using that to our advantage as well. It's no secret that my full-time employees' positions have changed and evolved since they started, but it's all been for the better. We've actually had everyone take the Strengths Finder test so we can make sure we're doing what really aligns with who they are and what makes them unique. It's been really eye-opening for all of us and allowed us to put our employees in their zone of genius, which is truly the best for all of us.

I honestly still have to pinch myself that this is real some days. If you had asked me a year ago if I'd have multiple full-time employees, I'd say no way. But it's been amazing to help my business grow and scale. I love being able to serve more of you well because of my incredible team. I hope this little snippet into how we hired full time employees is helpful for you! Make sure you join Behind the Lens and learn more about my outsourcing tips there - and tune into the podcast episode above to hear all about my full-time employees right now. These ladies are amazing!

Links Mentioned

+ My $3K Mini Sessions Blueprint

+ Behind the Lens

What We Discussed

How do you know if you're ready? (3:15)

Who do you hire? (5:46)

What do you look for in a hire? (9:27)

40. Building A Team: What To Do BEFORE You Hire

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 01 Nov 2021 06:00:00 -0500

I'm so excited today because we're starting our mini series here on the Business Journey Podcast all about building a team. Maybe you're interested in building a team soon - or maybe not, but the information we're sharing in this mini series is going to be super helpful when you're ready to make the leap. Today's episode is all about what to do before you hire a team member, which is the perfect place to start when you're dreaming of a team.

Before we dive into building a team, I wanted to share about a new freebie I've put together. It will show you five ways to grow your email list from 0 to 100 subscribers! Email marketing is SO important for small business owners (learn why I believe that HERE). Now, back to building a team.

What to Do Before You Hire a Team Member

Over the last year or so, I've built up a team in my business and now, I'm loving the chance to help other business owners build their own teams. One of the most common questions I get asked from other photographers is how to prepare to build a team. They may not be totally ready right now, but they want to get to a place where they are ready in the future. I think that's an amazing question because it's never to early to start preparing to build your team. A lot of these tips I'm sharing today, I wish I had done when I started building my team. Now, it's a breeze to bring on someone new because we know what we're doing! So, here's what you should do before you hire a team member!

Write out what you need to do in your business.

Think about every single thing that you do (or need to do) to make your business run. Get as micro was you need, but list it all out. We're doing this because I want you to see how much you actually do every day in your business. Once you know all the things you do, it's much easier to determine what you can let someone else do for you! After you've got it all written down, highlight what only YOU can do. If it requires your actual face, voice, or has a direct impact on your revenue, highlight it. In the end, there should be a few things highlighted - now it's clear to see how much you could truly hand over to someone else. With what's on your list, think about what you can automate and mark it with a star! These are things that you don't have to do physically anymore!

Document your processes.

With anything that isn't highlighted, start documenting your process. One of our favorite programs to do this is with Loom. It's a free recording software and you can literally do a screen recording of whatever you're doing. This is a great way to teach someone how to do something - like a gallery delivery for example! You can also document your process in a Google Doc or a Trello checklist. Our team does a lot of checklists and Loom recordings - but do what works for you. When it's time to onboard a new hire, you can send them the recording and checklist to review instead of having to hold their hand and teach them everything.

Make your processes as efficient as possible.

As you start to record and document these processes, look at how efficient they are. Are you including unnecessary or redundant steps? If you are, think about how to make it easier. When you hand it off to someone, you want that task to be as streamlined as possible. You may still wind up making changes after someone else comes in to help, but that's not a bad thing!

Think about where you want your business to go.

Most of these tips are practical, actual things to go. But part of being a team leader is having a vision. Think about where you want to be in a few years and lay out the roles beneath you that you want someday to make it happen. This is a bit of a dream scenario so don't think about costs right now - just where you want to be and who you'll need. Once you know who you might want, it's time to prioritize your hires as money and time allow. Having this dream organization chart helps me stay focused as our business evolves.

If you have any questions at all about hiring a team member, let's talk. I'm so passionate about building a team because I think it can be life changing for you as a business owner. Truly, it's never too early to start planning for your team, either. And, if you're interested in talking more deeply about hiring team members, I'll be going over this process in my Mastermind. It's currently full but you can join our waitlist for the next round! I work with 10-12 business owners in a mix of hot seat calls and education, so we can deep dive into your business! So, join the waitlist here if that's something you're interested in!

Links Mentioned in the Episode

+ How to Go from 0 to 100 Email Subscribers

+ Mastermind waitlist

+ Loom

+ Trello

What We Discussed

Write out what you do as a business owner (3:43)

Document the process (6:40)

Make your process efficient (8:35)

Create a dream organizational chart (9:30)

39. After Your Minis: Workflow Tips For After The Shoot

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 25 Oct 2021 06:00:00 -0500

I'm so excited to welcome you to another episode of the Business Journey Podcast, because today we're talking about what to do after your mini sessions are over. I'm diving into my favorite workflow tips for after your sessions. We've talked a lot about how to plan and prep for them, but what do you do when you head home? How do you manage all of the images and clients you had the chance to work with? Today, we're going to break down how workflow tips for after your mini sessions! Before we jump into all of that, though, I wanted to let you know about my Free Minis Class! This class dives into what many sessions are and how to structure them right so that you can maximize your profit. And then we talk a ton about marketing. You can check it out at HERE.

Wait a day to start processing your photos.

Honestly, coming home from photographing a bunch of minis and then jumping right into post processing is kind of overwhelming. So, I recommend waiting a day to get into all of your editing. They're long days and sometimes things go really well - and let's be real, sometimes they don't. But waiting a day allows some of that emotion to cool so that you can be in the right headspace to edit your images (or send them to your editor!). Back them up as soon as you get home, but don't start culling or editing in that moment. Trust me!

Organize your files well!

Hopefully I can explain our system well to you.... but, when we start organizing files from our mini session, we put all of our mages on a hard drive. I have one master folder for that set of mini sessions. Always put the location and the date! Then, inside that master folder, we have three more folders. A "Capture" folder which is where all of the RAW files will go. Next is a "selects" folder, which will have any images we choose as the final images for our clients. And then finally, we have an "Output" folder, which is the final edited images. Within those folders, I have a folder for each family. I label it by the number session they were of the day (1, 2, etc.) and then mom's first and last name... so the file name might look like: 1-Rebecca Rice when I'm all done. This helps me keep everything in order so there's no confusing who is who!

Batch your work.

Once you've got all of your folders set up and the photos dumped into the "Capture" folder, it's time to batch your work. By that I mean, sit down and cull all of your photos at the same time. Edit them and deliver the images at the same time to your clients. By doing each family individually, you're not really maximizing your time. Instead, focus on one type of task at a time. I've found I'm a lot more productive when I can do everything at once, for example: I cull in PhotoMechanic. It's a one time purchase and it's amazing because it's SO much faster to cull through images - and more efficient. Then I go into Lightroom and edit everything and then do one sitting where I prep the galleries in Shootproof.

Write out your workflow.

There's two purposes to having your workflow organized. One, it gets it out of your head and makes sure that your entire team knows what's going on. If something happens to you or you need help, how do you explain to someone where everyone is in the process? Have a written list so that it's easy to follow, no matter who's helping you. The other reason that you need to organize your workflow is to ensure that every client gets the same experience. I've talked about Trello before - but we use it for our team and every session has a checklist so that we make sure we know what's going on! PS. Don't forget - in Behind the Lens, we actually share our EXACT workflow and Trello board with you so that you can get your workflow organized today!

There you have it! Four easy tips to master your workflow after your mini sessions. Running a profitable and successful business is really about organizing yourself in a way that works for you. Creating systems that can be easily replicated at high volume is important and the best way to make sure you make it through your busy season in one piece! I hope these tips help you this year with your mini sessions!

Links Mentioned in the Episode

+ Behind the Lens

+ Free Minis Class

What We Discussed

Wait a day to start (2:53)

Organize your files (3:59)

Batch your work (6:58)

Write out your workflow (8:38)

38. Avoiding Burn-out: Tips For Tackling Busy Season

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 18 Oct 2021 06:00:00 -0500

Welcome back to another episode of the Business Journey Podcast. Today's episode is really important to me because it's something I did wrong my entire first year of business. I learned quickly afterwards that I didn't want my business running on a trajectory that put me in a space of exhaustion and burnout. So, today I want to share some tips that are super practical to help you avoid burnout and tackle your busy season. These tips will help you feel in control, fresh, and ready to keep working!

Before we jump into those tips, I want to remind you that I do have my FREE Mini Sessions class running right now. In this class, you'll learn how to elevate your client experience - without more stress for you, and improve your marketing strategies so that you can become fully booked. If you're ready for those tips (and more!), sign up here. Now, onto those tips!

Learning to work from a place of rest.

I learned this from Ashlyn Carter. She's a copywriter and she's always helped me believe that it is possible to work from a place of rest and not hustle. It seems like so many people in our industry are always pushing and "hustling". The truth is that you don't have to work from that pace to be successful. Sure, working from a place of rest might take you a little longer, but it will be more fulfilling in the end. My first year in business, I photographed over 100 families. By the time the fall ended, I was burnt out. I wanted to sleep for a whole week and I couldn't. Life kept going on around me. And I decided in that moment, I couldn't do that again. The tips I'm about to share will help you find this margin and breathing room, too. It's such an amazing feeling!

Write out your processes ahead of time.

Anything you do for your clients from the session, editing, or post-processing, write it out. I know you think you know it and you have it all in your head, but when you're in the middle of a busy season... something is going to be forgotten. And even if it's not, you're going to just feel crazy overwhelmed. So these written processes are what you come to lean on when the crazy hits. Our checklists help make sure every single client is given the same experience, no matter how busy we are. Our team uses Trello and if you're in Behind the Lens, we actually talk about our exact system and process for this software (plus you'll get a template for our workflows!).

Know your capacity and stick with it.

One thing that's important in avoiding burnout is to know your capacity and to stick with it. It's one thing to know you've reached capacity, but it's another entirely to actually stick to it and tell people "no". Just because there's white space or margin in your calendar and life doesn't mean you need to fill it with bookings. Being completely overwhelmed because you can't say "no" doesn't help anyone. It leads directly to burn out and if you're running at 120% all the time, you're never going to have time to recover. Frankly, it's not sustainable or healthy for you or your business.

Automate and outsource what you can.

I probably sound like a broken record because we talk about outsourcing and automation a lot, but I truly believe and am passionate about both! Look through your client experience and see what you can automate in your CRM (like Dubsado). After you've done that, determine what you can outsource to someone else. I know it can be hard to let go of your editing or writing, but if it saves you time and someone can do it just as well - if not better - than you, why wouldn't you let them help? You can read about my experience with outsourcing my editing HERE.

Plan your rest.

I don't know about you, but if I don't write something down or put it on my calendar, it won't happen. So literally, plan your rest in. Block off certain days or weeks that you won't be shooting. It's a non-negotiable appointment now and your whole job is to rest. If you plan to rest, you'll have much more to give to your business and your family/relationships. Trust me!

I hope that these tips help you avoid burnout as we go into a super busy fall. I want you to be able to thrive through your busiest seasons and take them in stride, instead of letting them run you. You deserve that and your family, relationships and clients deserve that too.

Links Mentioned in the Episode

+ 20% OFF DUBSADO

+ Behind the Lens

+ Free Minis Class

What We Discussed

Working from a place of rest (2:17)

Write out processes ahead of time (5:16)

Know your capacity (7:19)

Automate + outsource (11:54)

Plan your rest (13:44)

37. Automations With Your Family Photography Business With Dolly DeLong

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 11 Oct 2021 06:00:00 -0500

I'm so excited - it's Monday, so we've got another great episode of the Business Journey Podcast to share with you! Today, we're welcoming a sweet friend of mine: Dolly DeLong. If you've been listening for awhile now, you know that I mention Dolly quite a bit. I always say "#belikedolly" because she is just amazing, so sweet, and is truly a champion of community building. She was one of my first friends when I moved to Nashville and I'm so thankful for her. Dolly is a family photographer and educator here in Nashville, TN and is just a wealth of knowledge. She is an expert in all things automations and workflows and systems, and so I know you guys are in for a treat because today we're talking all about automations for your family photography business. So grab your notebook and let's chat!

Here's what we're talking about today!

Meet Dolly (1:30)
Why automations matter as a family photographer (2:20)
A reminder that you are smart/savvy enough to build your workflows (3:36)
What happens to your business if you aren't there to run it (6:05)
Start by creating email templates (11:30)
Automate your lead capture form (20:00)
How to streamline your entry points (32:01)
Write a proposal for your business (36:20)

Thank you, Dolly!

Dolly is seriously changing the game when it comes to workflows and automations for small business owners, so make sure you check her out! Her website is HERE and she's on Instagram, too. She is amazing, so go see what she's got for you!

Links Mentioned

+ How to Create a Contact Form That Wows (Dolly's Training)

+ 20% OFF DUBSADO

+ 50% OFF HONEYBOOK

+ Email Templates

36. 3 Reasons Flash Isn't As Scary As You Think With Rob Greene

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 04 Oct 2021 06:00:00 -0500

Another great episode of the Business Journey Podcast is live! I'm chatting with a good friend of mine, Robe Greene, who's literally the King of Flash for Photographers. He's just incredible and so knowledgeable - and I'm so happy that he's here to talk with us today. Rob and I met because I bought a camera for one of my associates and when he dropped it off, we just hit it off. He's been an incredible resource for me and my students... if you're in Behind the Lens, you'll recognize Rob! I'm thrilled to be sharing him with you all today and I hope you realize that flash isn't as scary as you think! He's sharing some super practical tips about how to become more confident with your flash.

Meet Rob (1:40)
Rob and I have a surprise for you! (4:25)
The reality: we all hate shooting flash (6:31)
How Rob got started using his flash (8:45)
Flash photography is based on the same concepts as natural light photography (9:40)
It's okay if you don't understand your flash! (11:23)
Flash photography uses same exposure settings you already use (13:28)
Flash photography gives you more control over your final images (18:57)

As you'll see once you listen to the whole episode, Rob is truly the expert when it comes to flash. And he (and I) truly want you to feel confident using your flash. It's a great tool for us as photographers. That's why I'm SO excited that we're going to be hosting this joint webinar on Thursday and Friday. Remember, it's FREE and you can get replay if you miss it (or just want to watch it again!), but only if you sign up. Trust me when I say Rob will help you feel more comfortable and confident with that cute little flash you carry around and try to avoid using. It will seriously change your life! Join us later this week - I hope to see you there!! SIGN UP HERE!

Thank you, Rob!

Ready to learn more about Rob? You can find him at Square 8 Studio on all social media platforms and YouTube. His website is HERE too! He has so many amazing things coming for photographers - you won't want to miss the chance to connect with him.

Links Mentioned in the Episode

+ FREE Flash Class with Rob and Rebecca

+ Behind the Lens Membership

35. My Break From Social Media

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 27 Sep 2021 06:00:00 -0500

Happy Monday and welcome back to another episode of the Business Journey podcast! I'm so excited to share today's topic, because I'm telling you all about my break from social media. This is one of those episodes where I'm really pulling back the curtain and letting you see what life has been like lately. Having authentic and real conversations like this is so important to me and I can't wait to see what you think!

Why I took a break from social media!

At the beginning of August, I was super active on my social media. Not just posting and marketing active... but spending a LOT of time scrolling through Instagram and Facebook. It just sucks you in! You know how that is. I've tried to set limits before, but they weren't working. I found myself reaching for my phone throughout the day if I felt bored or had a lull. After getting really anxious one night because I couldn't remember where my phone was, I realized that I had become pretty addicted to it and to being constantly up to date. I decided then and there that I was going to take a big break from social media. I deserved better, so did my family!

How I managed taking this break!

As a business owner, I knew it was going to be a little tricky but I have a team that helps with pushing content out. Occasionally, there's something I have to post personally so I would hop into the app, post it, and leave. Otherwise, it was up to my team to create and schedule the content. I actually deleted the apps from my phone! With the new iOS update, I actually did the quasi delete option so I could quickly do my business posts as needed. But it was off my home screen and way out of mind. I also turned off motivations and set up time limits. It was amazing!! Even just in the first few days, I realized that I was being really intentional with that time and not letting the apps run my life.

What I did instead....

When I'm not letting the apps suck my time, I'm an avid reader. So I made a point to pick up new books and read during this social media break. It made such a huge difference for me! And not just that, but being "bored" was good for me overall. I was more present with my kids. I could read and relax. My screen time just dropped dramatically all the way around - not just on those apps. With my Apple Watch, I was able to walk away from my phone more - I still got notifications if someone needed me. But I knew when it could wait (and when it couldn't!) and addressed it that way.

My take aways!

Honestly, the biggest thing I learned (and remembered) is that I can find what I need after the fact. There is no reason for me to need to see everything as it happens. I didn't miss people's dinner photos or my family's trips to the zoo. Later, when I logged on in my dedicated windows, I saw those things. And even if I hadn't, I could go look if I was worried. But I didn't really miss anything by stepping away. So, here's your challenge: take a week off of social media. See what happens for you, your family, and your business. You might be surprised! I'm here cheering you on!!

What We Discussed:

Why I took a social media break (1:26)

How I managed with my business (4:36)

What I did instead (6:50)

My take aways (10:11)

34. Blogging For Family Photographers With Kristina Dowler

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 20 Sep 2021 06:00:00 -0500

We've got a super exciting and jam packed episode of the Business Journey podcast today! My content writer, Kristina Dowler, is joining us today to talk all about blogging for family photographers. Kristina is our team's copywriter and she writes all of our blogs and emails. She's just incredible and an extension of me, so it's been such a valuable relationship! She is an expert in blogging which is why I'm thrilled to be talking about what she does and what you can be doing for your own business! Blogging is such a great (free) tool for your business and your marketing. Don't sleep on it. Today's episode will definitely convince you that it's worth the time and effort... and that you have more to say than you realize!

In today’s episode, we’ll be talking about:

Meet Kristina (3:06)
The benefits of blogging for family photographers (6:04)
Why optimizing your blogs really does matter (9:40)
How often should you be blogging for your family photography business? (12:00)
Blogging is a long-term game (16:13)
What can family photographers blog about? (17:31)
A few practical tips about how to make Google happy with your blogs (28:08)

Thank you, Kristina!

If you want to learn more about Kristina and her business, check out here website HERE! Not only is she a virtual assistant and content writer for small businesses, but she's now coaching too! If you think you need some extra help in your business, go check her out, seriously!

Links Mentioned in the Episode:

+ Email Templates

+ Kristina's 10 Tips to Kickstart Your Blog

+ Kristina's website

33. A Chat With My First Industry Friend

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 13 Sep 2021 06:00:00 -0500

I’m so excited about today’s episode of the Business Journey podcast because I’m introducing you to my very first industry friend, Courtney Bosworth. We always have a great time together and recording this episode for you was no exception. Today, we wanted to really dive into why it’s important to have industry friends, how it helps us both, and just a little look into our friendship. I love when I get to see and talk with Courtney - and I hope you'll understand why a friendship like this is important for YOU to have, too. I'm too thankful to give you a little peek into our relationship today. So let's get talking!

In today’s episode, we’ll be talking about:

Meet Courtney and learn about her business (1:39)
How we became friends (3:05)
What it was like before we had industry friendships (7:00)
A reminder that getting out of your shell can be a good thing (9:30)
Why you should remember you’re not the only one craving community (11:05)
What our favorite thing is about having a friend in the industry (13:15)
Some of our favorite memories (19:18)
Why we believe in finding a business bestie (30:32)

Thank you, Courtney!

If you want to learn more about Courtney, you can see her website HERE! She’s also got some amazing things up her sleeve for other moms in business. So, whether you’re a mom or just a photographer looking for some extra help, go take a look. Courtney is going to blow you away!

Links Mentioned:

+ Courtney’s Website

+ United

32. 3 Tips For Booking Out Your Mini-Sessions

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 06 Sep 2021 06:00:00 -0500

Welcome back to another episode of the Business Journey Podcast! I’m so excited about today’s topic because we’re going to be talking about ways to book out your mini sessions. I mean, anything about mini sessions makes my heart just so happy, but I especially love this topic! I’m going to be sharing 3 tips for booking out your mini sessions. Right now, it’s the beginning of September, so you should 100% be advertising your holiday minis and getting them booked. So I can’t wait to share these practical tips with you so that you can start filling up those sessions.

Don’t forget, if you want to learn even more secrets about marketing, monetizing, and maximizing your profits with mini sessions, I have a FREE class for you! We dive deep into all of these topics, especially marketing, and it can be a huge help as you prepare for those holiday mini sessions. Sign up here! Now, onto those tips for booking out your mini sessions!

Start with your email list.

If you don’t have an email list for your business yet, this is your sign to start one. It doesn’t have to be fancy…. I call mine my VIP list and it’s filled with past and potential clients. They’ve agreed to sign up for my list and give me their email so they get updates from me and priority booking access for any sessions we offer. I truly believe in the power of an email list because these are your warmest potential clients. That’s why I recommend emailing them first about your sessions. They’ve done the work and know what you do and they’re going to WANT to book first! (PS, if you want more tips about email marketing go check out Episode 12 of the podcast!)

Be smart when you market to the public.

After you’ve emailed your VIP list, now it’s time to go to social media if you still have spots to fill. The first smart way to market on social media is to create scarcity. I go really in depth with this in my free class, but basically I recommend that you start marking with only ONE date for your minis. Instead of opening up three days at once, start with just one. When that fills, you can open the next date and so on. Not only does it create scarcity, but it also makes your shooting schedule easier - and less spread out!

Stick with it!

I can’t tell you how many conversations I’ve had with photographers who stopped trying to offer mini sessions because they get discouraged after a week or two of advertising. Good marketing takes time! I always recommend giving yourself 6-8 weeks to be booking your mini sessions. Depending what time of year it is or what’s going on, bookings might be slow. But stick it out! In my Profitable Mini Sessions 2.0 course, I actually have a whole module on troubleshooting if you’re not booking minis. Just remember, don’t throw in the towel. There’s so many factors that can impact why you’re booking - so keep trying!

The bottom line of booking out your mini sessions is to be patient and keep trying. I hope that these three simple tips help you feel ready to tackle your next mini sessions! You can do it!!

Links Mentioned:

+ Free Minis Class

+ Profitable Mini Sessions 2.0

What We Discussed:

Start with your email list (2:22)

Smart marketing on social media (4:56)

Stick with it (7:50)

31. 3 Workflows Every Family Photographer Should Be Using

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 30 Aug 2021 06:00:00 -0500

It’s Monday, so you know what that means: another episode of the Business Journey podcast is out! Today, we’re talking about three workflows every family photographer should be using. But, before we get too far into things… Don’t forget to sign up for my FREE class all about marketing mini sessions. As you prepare for fall and Christmas minis, it’s the perfect time to make sure your marketing is where it should be so you can have a fully booked calendar. Join us HERE!

Let’s define what a workflow is. When I say “workflow”, I basically mean a list of steps that you follow. I like to think of it as a checklist for whatever task we’re working on. And I believe every family photographer should be using the three workflows we’re going to talk about today! You can definitely write it out on paper or in an app, like Trello. My team and I LOVE using Trello because we can make templates of these workflows and apply them to every single client, blog, or whatever other thing we need to. It’s amazing to quickly see where everything is in the business!

Client Experience Workflow

The first workflow I think every family photographer should be using is a client experience workflow. This one should contain all of the steps that your clients go through for the first time the inquire with you to the delivery of their gallery – and even beyond if you have anything else you do (like ask for a review!). Write out your client experience as it stands now. Think about what touch points they receive, emails and other communication, all of it. Then decide how you might want to tweak that in the future. Do you want them to have a blog post about a frequently asked question? Do you want to add in gifting? That kind of thing! Then, you can start to automate these steps through a management software like Dubsado (my favorite!) or Honeybook.

Remember, the goal here is to be able to provide every single client with the same experience. If one family got a questionnaire, they all should. These checklists help you make sure that you are providing the same experience for each client!

Post-Processing Workflow

The next workflow every family photographer should be using is a post-processing workflow. To me, this is everything that happens after you shoot the session. This would be things like backing up your images, culling photos, sending to your editor (or editing), blogging, and social media posts. Again, make a list of everything you do once you get home from your session! This is the kind of list that I keep in Trello. I’m able to add a list to every session there to make sure our team never forgets a step. Trello also lets you add due dates which is super nice. I hate admitting it but in my first year of business, I definitely forgot to do some of those steps – even delivering galleries – so I never wanted that to happen again! That’s why I LOVE workflows!

Maintenance Workflow

The last workflow I believe every family photographer should have is a maintenance workflow. This one is often overlooked and contains tasks that many of us probably overlook. A maintenance workflow’s tasks will be done maybe once a quarter or throughout the year, but not every day or week. Tasks here might be things like backing up all of your photos, refreshing your website portfolio or adding new testimonials. I’d also encourage you to review your workflows each year too and see if you need to change anything up!

Figure out what kind of system will work best for you: whether it’s an online list system like Trello, Asana, or Monday or a notebook. Create these workflows and follow them every single time you do one of these tasks, book a session, or need to go through some maintenance work. Believe it or not, once these are setup, they take so much pressure off of you to remember every single task! And seriously, any time that you can get back in your life by not having to remember all of this is a game changer!

Links Mentioned in Episode:

+ FREE Minis Class

+ Trello

+ 20% OFF DUBSADO

+50% OFF HONEYBOOK

What We Discussed:

Client Experience workflow

Post-processing workflow

Maintenance workflow

30. Elevating Your Client Experience With Albums

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 23 Aug 2021 06:00:00 -0500

Happy Monday! We’ve got another great episode of the Business Journey Podcast for you today! We’re chatting all about elevating your experience as a photographer by offering albums. Look, I swore for years I’d never offer albums. But the reality is that owning a business is a journey and sometimes on that journey… you wind up eating your words, ha! So, here we are: offering albums and loving every minute of it. Today, I want to dive into what the process looks like, our journey with albums, and how you can start adding it to your experience today! I truly believe in elevating your client experience with albums and I hope you will, too!

Before we get into everything, I wanted to share something exciting! I'm hosting a FREE class with the CEO of Kiss Books TODAY!!! This is a two part series to learn ALL about how I use albums in my client experience, specifically with mini sessions!! I can't WAIT to how you how I've been able to increase my profits AND serve my clients through albums!! CLICK HERE to join me TODAY at 2pm CST!! Select “Register to All Dates” when you join and be automatically enrolled in BOTH free classes (happening today and Thursday!)! A replay will be available and sent out shortly after the live class.

Now, onto today’s topic…

My Journey with Albums

For the longest time, I said I would never offer albums for my clients. Albums are great but I was convinced that the only way to actually sell albums well was by doing in-person sales (IPS) and I did NOT have time for that. For years, that’s what I believed and albums stayed off my offerings. But, recently I connected with the CEO of Kiss Books, Sean Gordon. He helped me talk through this fear of offering albums because of IPS and having time. He totally transformed the way I look at albums now! (We’re talking a lot about this on our webinar on Thursday so make sure you sign up - CLICK HERE!)

When I realized I didn’t have to do IPS to sell albums, everything changed. We decided to try out the offer and added to my collections and associate team. Surprise? It worked! We have clients buying albums now. They've never seen them. They aren’t coming to my studio to go through them or design them. And my clients are LOVING them!

Benefits of Selling Albums

Through offering albums to my clients, I’ve come to realize there’s some very distinct benefits to offering albums. First, it elevates your client experience and justifies higher pricing for your sessions. It also helps set you apart. How many family photographers around you right now include albums in their collections? Now you can offer these beautiful albums! Seriously, KISS creates beautiful albums that your clients are going to love. And they’re affordable for you!

Even more important than that, we’re creating the tradition of printed photos for our clients. Many clients don’t realize how badly they want their photos printed until they’re in their hands. Now, they’ll have the expectation to have an album each year. What an amazing experience - and heirloom to pass down! Personally, we have young kids right now who want to look through photos all the time. Imagine being able to provide that memory to your clients!

Make sure to sign up for the webinars this week so you can be part of the rest of the conversation about albums and offering them as a photographer. I’m so excited to be jumping into this world with all of you! I hope this helps you get excited to start elevating your client experience with albums!!

Links Mentioned in this Episode:

+ KISS Books Webinar

+ KISS Books Discount

What We Discussed:

The KISS Books Webinars (1:39)

My Journey with Albums (4:04)

Benefits of Selling Albums (6:16)

29. The Best Investment I Ever Made For My Business

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 16 Aug 2021 06:00:00 -0500

I’m so excited for today’s episode of the Business Journey podcast! Today, I’m talking about the best investment I ever made for my business! I’m several years into my business now and I’m a huge believer in education for business owners. No matter where you are in business, I absolutely believe that education can make a huge difference in your business. Of all the investments in education I've made over the years, I’m confident that my mastermind investment was the best one I ever made for business.

Before we get too into everything, I want to remind you about a FREE class we have for you! It’s all about mini sessions and how to market for success. Check it out HERE - so you can get your fall minis off to a good start this year! Now, back to masterminds…

What is a mastermind?

If you’ve never done or heard of a mastermind before, it’s basically intimate group coaching. One person is in charge of teaching and running the mastermind and there’s usually 6-10 other members of your group. You learn together, bounce ideas off each other, and really become a tight knit group. In the last 18 months, I’ve been a part of 4 masterminds. And while it’s been a big investment (we’re talking almost $18K), I whole-heartedly believe it’s the best thing I could have done. By the way - I’ve made all that back (and then some), which is one way to tell those masterminds were absolutely worth it!

Some exciting news!

I want to share something exciting with you! I’m actually starting my own mastermind! It’s been something in the works for a long time over here, but I’m finally in a place where I’m ready to share about it! Like many masterminds, there will be an application so that we can decide if this will be a good fit for you (or not). You can find that application HERE! Read on to see if a mastermind might be the best fit for you - and don't forget to apply!

Why to Join a Mastermind

Over the last 18 months, and because of all of these masterminds, I have greatly accelerated my growth. Do I believe I could have gotten here on my own? Of course, but without the help I had, it wouldn’t have happened as quickly! I gained so much value from my coaches and the other students in my masterminds. With their help, I was able to make better decisions in and for my business. They’ve been where I am now and I could make more educated and thoughtful decisions with their guidance.

I also really believe in masterminds because of the relationships you form. Not only did I get industry leaders literally in my back pocket, cheering me on - but I got to connect with other amazing leaders in the group. There’s something really amazing about connecting with people who know exactly what you're going through. Some of my best relationships now are from these groups!

And the last reason I believe in masterminds is because of accountability! I’m very much a self-starter. I’m a visionary and Enneagram 3. I like to do all the things. But, it was amazing to have people in my corner reminding me about those things I started and never made it back to. They were there reminding me of all of the ideas I had, and not only reminding me - but helping me go after those things. Not only that, but you have lots of other people looking at your business and helping you generate ideas to make sure you’re reaching the goals you set for yourself. What more could you ask for?!

What’s included in my mastermind?

Masterminds are truly for business owners who are ready to level up in their businesses! I never offer 1:1 mentoring so this mastermind is really a special group and I can’t wait to see who winds up in our mastermind!! If you’re wondering what’s included, I want to break it down for you. You’ll get weekly calls with me and unlimited Voxer access to me. We’re going to make our mastermind 1 month long. It’ll be intense but it will be so much fun! If you’re at all interested, make sure you apply - even if you’re not 100% sure if you’re a good fit or not.

I can’t wait to start reviewing applications. Together, we’ll decide if this is a wise investment for your business. I want you to feel confident, to hit your goals, and I can't wait to pour into you and your business! Get that application in. Remember, you can apply HERE!

Links Mentioned:

+ Mastermind Application

+ Free Mini Session Class

Topics We Discussed:

What is a Mastermind? (2:09)

My exciting news! (3:38)

Why Join a Mastermind (5:50)

What's included in Rebecca's Mastermind (15:45)

28. A Conversation With My Editor

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 09 Aug 2021 06:00:00 -0500

Today’s a super special episode of the Business Journey podcast because we’re chatting with someone who’s important and vital to my business: my private editor! Alisa and I will be talking all about what it’s like working with a private editor and why you should consider outsourcing your editing. I truly believe that outsourcing can change your business and your life, so I’m thrilled to be chatting with Alisa about everything editing today! So many of my students ask when they should hire an editor and my answer is always “yesterday!” but, in all seriousness I think it’s a great place to start your outsourcing journey, so let’s dive in!

In today’s episode, we’ll be talking about:

Alisa’s journey to becoming a private editor (3:00)
The role of a private editor: what they do (and don’t!) for photographers (5:33)
How Alisa works to match photographer’s styles (6:42)
A reminder that it’s okay if YOU aren’t the one editing your images! (9:55)
When you’re ready to hire a private editor (11:27)
How having an editor has allowed me to remove my emotions from the editing process (18:02)
What Alisa looks for in potential clients (20:28)
What a private editor can cost (25:06)
How photographers can find the best fit for them when looking for editors (29:30)

Thank you, Alisa!

If you want to learn more about Alisa, you can check out here website HERE! She’s also launching a course this fall for anyone interest in how to edit photos and become an editor, which is amazing!! In the meantime, she has a free course as well and I can’t wait for you to get it if editing is something you’re interested in. A huge thank you to Alisa for coming to chat with me today all about private editing for photographers. I’m so thankful for her in my business - and I know you will be too when you hire out your editing.

Links Mentioned:

+ Alisa's website

+ Cultivated Edits

+Janelle Joy Photo Editing

27. The Making of "Behind The Lens with Rebecca Rice"

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 02 Aug 2021 06:00:00 -0500

I'm thrilled we've got another episode of the Business Journey podcast for you today! Today's topic is all about Behind the Lens, my membership for family photographers. I thought it was the perfect time to chat more about what Behind the Lens is, who it's for, and a little inside scoop about how it's made! This membership was created with family photographers in mind. I wanted to give family photographers a look at REAL family portrait sessions so they could see what it's like, why I make the choices I do for lighting, posing, and how I run my session. It's filled with behind the scenes footage of actual family photos sessions I photograph plus my voice over to explain what's going on. Each month, members also get a Masterclass from me or a guest expert. We've talked about Pinterest, blogging, flash, and so much more already and we're only 4 months in! Anyway, I want to dive into the making of "Behind the Lens with Rebecca Rice", so let's get to it!

Why did I want to make Behind the Lens?

Honestly, this membership had been on my heart for SO long. I learned from incredible educators when I first began my journey into photography. But the problem was, I couldn't really find resources specific to family photographers. So much of what I could get access t was for weddings, seniors or newborns. And while that's all great and taught me so much, I realized there was a void here. Family photographers were being left out. So I decided I want to fill that gap and offer something for family photographers. I waited for a year and a half to be in a season of life where this membership was actually feasible and it's been so worth it so I could serve you all well!

Why behind the scenes footage?

When I first started as a family photographer, I would ask local photographers if I could shadow them. I just wanted to see an actual family photographer in action. And honestly? A lot of them said no, because they thought I would be direct competition. This was why I wanted to create an element of virtual mentorship. That way, no matter where you are, you can learn from a photographer who's been there. So in the videos that are a part of Behind the Lens, I take the time to break down each of my decisions when it comes to lighting, posing, and prompts.

Why is it so affordable?

Another thing I realized while I was sorting through the education I completed for my own business is that resources in the photography world are EXPENSIVE. And they're definitely worth it! I truly believe that. But, I also know that it isn't always in someone's budget to pay hundreds of dollars for a course. So I wanted to create something that was affordable, no matter where you are in your business. That's another reason I wanted to include masterclasses in addition to the behind the scenes footage. I want you to have access to something helpful, in every stage of your business.

What kind of content is included?

One of my favorite parts of Behind the Lens is that I can cater the content you receive each month based on the feedback I get from students. I've shown sessions with toddlers, an in home lifestyle session, a mommy and me session. It's been really fun to come up with something that's unique each month to provide you with the best possible education. And as a little sneak peek, we've got a session with adult children coming up soon and a cake smash! But, it's not just about the type of session. It's also about locations. I'm showing students how to take little parts of their neighborhood and make magic. We've talked about using flash in a dark house. One session is even on the beach! I want to be sure that you feel prepared for any situation you're in. I seriously listen to all of your feedback and requests. When I knew I wanted to do this membership, I wanted it to be fluid and able to adjust to your needs!

A thank you...

This membership would not be possible without every photographer that has joined in, provided feedback, and taken our classes. We currently have over 400 members! It's amazing. Seriously, I love watching each and every one of you become better photographers, ask for help, and build a community. It's just incredible. I would have never imagined that this would grow so fast, but it just goes to show how needed this resources. And I love that I get to help step in and fill that gap.

If you're not a member of Behind the Lens, now's the time to jump in! It's $14/month and I promise it will be the best $14 you've ever spent. You'll get access to the behind the scenes videos, masterclasses, and our Facebook community - which might just be my favorite part!

Links Mentioned in this Episode:

+ Behind the Lens Membership

What We Discussed:

Why did I make Behind the Lens? (2:06)

Behind the scenes format (5:07)

What's the cost? (7:44)

What kind of content is included? (9:20)

A thank you! (13:00)

26. Lessons Learned From A Year Full Time

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 26 Jul 2021 06:00:00 -0500

Today's episode of the Business Journey Podcast is a really special one. We're celebrating that I've been full-time in my photography business for ONE full year! There's been so many great moments and plenty of moments that taught us some hard lessons. But, I thought today it might be fun to talk about a few of the lessons I've learned over the last year.

Before we dive into all of that, I want to share my FREE resource with you as you're planning those fall minis! It's planning season, people! This resource gives you 12 great themes for mini sessions. They're all tried and true, so I hope that they help you kickstart your planning this year. You can grab it HERE!

My story...

If you don't know much about me or my backstory, let me recap for you. First off, this isn't my first year in business. It's just my first year full-time. I was in ministry before I went full-time in my business. For 9 years, I worked in youth ministry and while I was there, I began my photography business. During my first year in business, I surpassed my full-time job income... which we didn't expect at all. At the time, I was totally content with my church job and kept my photography as a side gig for a bit longer. It was a great creative outlet. At the same time, the Lord began to move our hearts around a move to Nashville, TN. Since my husband is a musician and radio producer, it seemed like a great idea. But, we never really knew when it was going to happen.

Last summer, we were really pushed and realized that was our sign. At that time, I left the church job and became a photographer full-time. Daniel came into the business full-time with me in September. We still can't believe that my business provides full-time jobs for BOTH of us. I never dreamed of this. Honestly, I didn't think I wanted to be home full-time and be with my kids - I just wanted my work and to be with them around that. But when COVID hit, I realized how lucky we really were. And I love it now! I thought sharing some of what we've learned this year might help you - wherever you are in your business!

Lesson #1: Find a rhythm.

Working from home full-time is a lot harder than I thought it would be. When you work for someone else, they control most of your job. When you work, where you work, and all that stuff. But when you run your own business, you're the boss! You can control what you do. I'm a naturally self-motivated person, so getting what I needed done wasn't the problem. Instead, finding our rhythm as a family was the tricky part. I know that I prefer scheduled times to work. It's better for me. But with kids and the space we lived in last year, it was hard. Now that we're in our new home, I have an office for the first time. Daniel has a studio. We've started scheduling work hours and have hired a nanny. We've found what works for our family and our business and that's key.

Lesson #2: Batching is key.

If you've never heard the term, batching is simply a time management principle where you do like things together. Instead of writing just one blog post, I'll sit down and write 4. Then I can go to the next step of the prepping process for all four for the month instead of doing the entire process every time I sit down. Since I only have three days a week to work, I have to be super intentional. So I have laid out my week in a way that allows me focus on ONE type of task at a time so I can prep as much as possible in one sitting. For example, on Fridays, I record my podcasts. I try to record as many as I can at once so it's off my plate.

Lesson #3: Bring on help when you can.

I already mentioned that we have a nanny, but there's so many ways to bring help into your business and personal life. And believe me, it is always worth it! I will admit that I had a hard time with this at first. I was worried about supporting our family and also being a control freak... but, I've learned to trust that God will provide. I've built a team who help me with all of my business stuff and we have a nanny at home supporting our family. Although I may not know how our income will look every month, I can plan and budget and do my best.

Lesson #4: It's been an unexpected blessing.

I could go on for days about all of the things I've learned, but I'll end with this one. Being home with my kids has been such an unexpected blessing. I never planned on both me and Daniel being home with them. I was a working mom with kids in daycare. But being able to be home for nap times and lunches together has really been so sweet. If we want to leave the house and go out for lunch together, we can. We can go to the park together and play when we want to. Being able to have that flexibility is SUCH a great feeling. It's also really weird. I didn't have that for a long time - I had limited vacation time, a strict schedule, and now I don't. Now, I can make our life what we want.

This year hasn't always been easy. We've had some bumps in the road, but even in the rough seasons, God is so faithful and He provides for us. I'm so happy that our journey has brought us here. And, if you're on the cusp of going full-time in your business, I wish you SO much luck. Plan carefully, think and be strategic, and enjoy the ride. It's so worth it.

Links Mentioned in this Episode

+ 12 Ideas for Mini Session Themes

What we discussed:

My back story (2:15)

Find a rhythm (6:33)

Batching is key (12:41)

Bring on help (14:06)

Enjoy the blessing (16:37)

25. 5 Ways To Maximize Your Slow Season

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 19 Jul 2021 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

As family photographers, we have a natural busy season and a natural slow season. For me, I've found summer and winter to be slower. Everyone loves having photos done in the spring and fall, so making the most of my slower seasons has always been important to me. For anyone offering mini sessions, now is the time to be planning for those fall and Christmas sessions, which we talked about on a recent episode (listen HERE). And, don't forget, if you're working on minis for the fall and winter, I have a great FREE resource to help you decide which themes to go with! Beyond prepping for mini sessions, there's other ways to maximize your slow season, so today let's jump into 5 things you can be doing before work picks up again! These tasks will help you optimize your business so everything is running efficiently, even on your busiest days.

Review your client experience.

When I'm not shooting a lot, the first thing I do is review my client experience. Take the time to look over the entire process from start to finish. What is it like when they inquire with me? Am I sending emails - and what's included? How can I serve my clients better? I've talked a ton about client experience on the blog before now, so you can look through some posts about that. But really, it's just about being in my clients' shoes and making sure they're having the best possible experience with me. I want it to be easy and to reduce any questions or concerns on their end. And it doesn't end there. Think about how you can serve them well after your session (or during it!), like a cooler with water for sessions or a thank you gift of an ornament after a Christmas mini. Little things like that can go a long way!

Update your workflows.

Alright, so I know this is a pretty boring task, but trust me: it will make a difference in your busy seasons. Workflow will mean something different to everyone... it could be an actual workflow in Honeybook or Dubsado, or just a Trello checklist. Whatever it is, make sure you have a single system that works for every single client so you never lose track of what's going on with them or their photos. And, if you don't have a workflow already, now's the time to start one. Take a piece of paper and write EVERY single part of your experience with a client. This is a process you should review regularly. But, definitely take the time each slow season to ensure your workflows are as optimized as possible. Seriously, if you don't need something anymore, REMOVE it. And if you want to add something new in (like asking for reviews!), build out the steps to make that happen.

Automate whatever you can.

During your slow season, you should be looking at what you can automate and delegate when it comes to your business. Are there emails you can setup to go automatically? What about questionnaires or guides? You don't need to be the one pushing "Send". Put that CRM to use! Also take the time to look at what you can outsource. As you grow and get busier, getting help is going to be key! Trust me, it's way more affordable than you think. If someone else can do it at least 80% as well las you (or better), that task can be outsourced. Outsourcing will allow you to focus your energy where it's needed most. You can read more about my thoughts on outsourcing here!

Plan ahead for the next season.

A great way to help maximize your off season is to plan ahead for your next season. Right now, that would look like planning for the fall! So, take out your calendar (digital or paper) and decide what dates you're going to be shooting. This is especially helpful when you're planning fall and Christmas mini sessions. But, regardless of what you're shooting, determine when you can do it. Also add in days to edit and prep galleries and of course, days off. Busy season can drain even the best professional so build in time to take a break!

Back up your photos.

The last thing you can do to maximize your slow season is to back up your photos. I know it sounds silly, but it's something that's overlooked ALL the time by photographers. And I have so many horror stories to convince you about WHY this is important. But trust me, it is. So take the time and back up those photos. For me, that looks like the online gallery on Shootproof and two backup drives that are identical copies of each other. Even when a session is way over, I keep the galleries in my Shootproof archive so I always have them. There's so many places you can back up photos: Blaze, Dropbox, Google Drive, whatever it is, BACK THEM UP!

I hope these five tasks will allow you to maximize your slow season! It's so easy to let things run the way they have forever... but that's not how you grow. Take the time to invest and work on your business. Your future self will thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

+12 Ideas for Mini Sessions

+ 20% off Dusbado

+ 50% OFF HONEYBOOK

+ Shootproof

What we discussed:

Look over your Client Experience (4:28)

Update your workflows (7:33)

Automate whatever you can (9:41)

Plan ahead for the next season (12:58)

Back up your photos!!! (14:30)

24. Clubhouse Fall Minis Q&A

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 12 Jul 2021 06:00:00 -0500

It's Fall mini session prep time! That's why I recently hosted a Q & A about fall mini session prep and I thought I'd share some of the things we discussed with you! Preparing for mini sessions shouldn't be overwhelming. It should help you feel like you have a plan and you're going to sell out all of your spots because you're ready and prepped your audience. So let's dive into our Fall Minis Q & A! I hope these questions (and answers) help you feel ready to go this year!

How do you get promo shots without a setup?

I see this question a LOT, especially around holiday sessions like Red Truck mini sessions. If you don't have the setup yet for your holiday minis, which is totally cool, there's a few things you can do. The first is to rent your setup for 1 day for a few hours to capture promotional shots. Have a model call and bring in a real family to photograph in your setup. If you aren't able to rent your setup or the space for a small period of time, ask the rental company or location if they have any photos you can use for advertising. It's not always ideal but it can work. Post that image alongside images you've taken so people know what they're getting.

How do you recommend scheduling your promotions for Christmas minis in July and also fall mini sessions?

I think running a Christmas in July special can be a great way to build excitement for your Christmas minis. I would hold off really promoting your fall mini sessions until you're done with your Christmas in July marketing, though. I know for me and my team, we've sold almost all of our Red Truck mini session spots from this month's promotions alone! As soon as they fill up or July is over, you can start pushing the general fall mini sessions and then bring back the sign ups for Christmas ones again as it gets closer.

If you had a successful setup last year, should you offer it again?

I get this question a lot, but I think the answer is if it's a unique setup, then absolutely do it again! I know for me and my business, I do have clients that will book the same (or similar) setups year to year. For some families, it becomes a tradition. And for new families, it's nice to be able to offer them something they may not have been able to book the year before. If you're worried about it, you could also add an additional setup that's an option. That gives people more variety to choose from so they don't feel like they're "stuck" with the same setup as the year prior.

Is it too early to start advertising fall and holiday mini sessions?

The short answer? No! It's the perfect time to start getting your plan together for your fall and holiday mini sessions. If you're part of my Behind the Lens Membership, there's actually a quarterly planning masterclass from this month where we walked through how to plan mini sessions specifically with my associate, Bonnie. It's SO helpful and a great video to watch. All of that to say, now is the best time to start penciling in your dates for mini sessions and begin to plan the promo shots, marketing and all of that. In many ways, we're in an "off season" as family photographers, so take advantage of that.

How do I pick themes?

Another really popular question I get is about picking themes for mini sessions and if every session has to have props. I personally don't think every mini session has to have a big theme or props. Often for fall mini sessions, I'll pick beautiful locations. And I like giving that option to my families the option to have something that isn't themed or bright and colorful because they may want something they can display year round. Or it's just not their thing. For Christmas minis, I always try to offer the themed and non-themed setups because everyone likes something different! And PS, if you need more ideas, download my FREE guide with 12 theme ideas that work for mini sessions!

As you can see, we got into some REALLY fun topics about mini sessions. And there's SO many more over on the podcast today. Click "play" above and listen to them all. I hope this Fall Minis Q & A helps you plan your fall sessions with more confidence this year.

Topics we Discussed:

Promo shots without a setup (2:04)

Christmas in July (5:32)

Offering the same setup (7:42)

Is it too early to advertise? (10:01)

How do I pick themes? (12:03)

Links Mentioned in this Episode:

+ Behind the Lens Membership

+ 12 Themes Freebie

23. Prepping For Fall Minis

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 05 Jul 2021 06:00:00 -0500

We've got a brand new episode of the Business Journey Podcast for you today. This is a super popular and often requested topic: prepping for fall mini-sessions as a photographer! We talked about prepping for mini sessions in the spring time, and now that fall is fast approaching, we wanted to help you get ready again. I know it seems like July is TOO early to prep for fall mini-sessions but I promise you, it's not! Now's the time to start prepping, seriously.

Don't wait to prep!

One of the biggest mistakes I see photographers make when it comes to mini-sessions is that they wait too long to start planning. If you wait until the leaves change colors to start prepping your fall mini-sessions, you've already missed your window. Start implementing these tips now - I start booking my fall and Christmas mini-sessions in July and they book out every single time. Prep doesn't just mean tell people it's happening. Do some of the behind the scenes work now, too. One easy thing to do? Start making your rentals now - indoor spaces, props, trucks, whatever it is you need. Book and schedule them now before they're filled up for the fall and winter season!

Take promotional shots!

In order to advertise, you'll need promotional shots. Now's a great time to get them for your sessions. If you're using a new location, host a model call (or ask a former client) and have them pose for you. If you're using a setup with props, make sure you have photos of clients in the setup! Hopefully you've got some from last year, but if not, get it set up and have a model call. I know in the spring, promo shots can feel really tricky but for the fall, it's a LOT easier. Depending on the location, it can be really easy to make the images look like fall photos. And if you need a little help, I've got my Light & Airy Season Preset Pack in the shop! It's seriously like magic. You can put it on any photo and have it look like fall.

Anyway, for promotional shots I usually do a model call. I usually have interested families sign up through my email form (it adds them to my email list, so even better!) and then choose one family. They'll come be my models and get 5 images for their time. You can always upsell with additional images, too! They get beautiful images and you've got the ones you need to promote your fall mini-sessions. Win-win!

Start planning!

Alright, I know that sounds a little vague. But get out your calendar right now (paper or digital!) and let's dive into the timeline of fall minis. Decide what dates you're doing your fall and/or Christmas mini-sessions. I usually offer one date at three or four locations (so a total of four mini-session dates) for the fall. If this is your first season of sessions, just start with one date - you can always add more later! We tend to offer our fall mini-sessions in September. We may offer an early October one because people start to realize they never had family photos that year, but by the end of October and into November, we're pushing Christmas mini-sessions SUPER hard. I like to know that we can turn our images around in plenty of time for Christmas cards. It saves everyone's sanity, really. So, pick the dates you're going to offer (and rescheduling dates, too).

Open sessions!

Now, we start figuring out how to advertise those mini sessions! Look at the date of the sessions you've picked and count back 6-8 weeks. That's when you need to start advertising your sessions. I start by opening up my books to my email list first. Then, a a few days later, they open to the public. This is where your planning really comes in handy. You need to sit down and make sure everything is ready to start advertising at that point. Have your images ready, emails written, social media posts prepped. Do the hard stuff now because when the fall comes in, it gets BUSY. Every photographer experiences that! Set yourself up for success now.

Recap for me?

Right now, in the summer, you should be prepping for fall mini sessions by doing a few things. Decide on your dates, book rentals, grab promo shots at the location(s) or setups your using, and lay out your marketing schedule. Use this slower summer season to set yourself up for success this fall. You're going to be amazed at how much better it feels to sell out your mini-sessions because you were so prepared!

Topics We Discussed:

Don't wait to prep + book rentals (3:10)

Take promo shots (5:09)

Plan backwards (8:40)

Links Mentioned in Episode:

+ Light & Airy Seasonal Preset Pack

22. Comparing Dubsado, Honeybook, and Session For Mini-Sessions

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 28 Jun 2021 06:00:00 -0500

We've dropped another episode of the Business Journey Podcast today! And it's one I'm really excited about. Today, we're comparing CRMs for mini-sessions. What's a CRM? It's a client management system that helps you track client's progressions, as well as sends documents, and emails. Specifically, we're going to compare Honeybook, Dubsado, and Session for mini-sessions. Before we dive in though, I want to remind you that it's almost mini season! And as you're getting ready to plan, I know that sometimes it can feel stressful to plan a theme and hope it books. I've taken the guesswork out of picking a theme for you with my freebie that's ALL about 12 proven mini-session themes! Grab it today.

Which CRM should I use?

I'm asked this question all the time by students! Should I use Honeybook or Dubsado? And really, it's a super personal choice for you and your business. But, today I'm going to break down some differences between the softwares so that you can make an educated decision on which is best for you. I used Honeybook for a year and I currently use Dubsado, which I love (if you haven't figured that out already). There's also another software out there called Sessions that was built for mini-sessions! I learned early on that it just wouldn't do everything I need but it might be worth a trial for you. To me, the discussion is really between Honeybook and Dubsado. But let's talk about them all!

Session

Session is $19/mo. currently and is literally designed for people who aren't super tech-savvy. No shame in that! It's pretty streamlined and easy to set up, which is nice. Right away, it helps you set up a date for your sessions, set up a way for them to pick dates, and has built in reminders for your clients. So that's pretty nice! But depending how involved your client experience is, you may not be able to add everything you need - like me, I like to add in a client experience guide and I couldn't do that. The booking link is super streamlined for your clients and easy for them to sign up but overall it's a super basic system. If you have an involved workflow, you'll want to look at Honeybook or Dubsado.

Honeybook

Honeybook is currently $30/mo. (20% off with my code!). I used it for a year and really loved it. Honeybook is very user-friendly and beautiful, but wasn't quite as powerful (yet) as Dubsado. In Honeybook, you can build your own workflows and customize them much more than Session. So that's a plus! One thing I do love about Honeybook is their workflow pipeline. You can quickly see where someone is in the process of their session with you (signed contract, paid, etc.). Honeybook also has the ability to run reports and look at data, which Session does not. But, the one thing I don't love about Honeybook is their scheduler. Unlike Session or Dubsado, when you have someone sign up for a session through their calendar, you cannot trigger a workflow. So there's some extra work on your end to finish setting that up. To me, that kind of defeats the purpose of automation. But there's lots I DO like about their software!

Dubsado

A few dollars cheaper than Honeybook, Dubsado is $28/mo (and I have a 20% off coupon for them, too!). Like Honeybook, you can customize your own workflows which is amazing! But the customization doesn't stop there. Dubsado also allows you to customize that pipeline so you can easily see where clients are in the booking process. Additionally, you can actually build a step into your workflow that will move the client's project down the line (like to the editing "bucket"). I'm ALL about automating whatever I can! Dubsado's triggers for the workflow are also more robust - with more options. Ever have a client not fill out a questionnaire and wish you could remind them? Dubsado can! And when it comes to scheduling mini-sessions, you can trigger workflow steps like contracts and invoices, so you don't even have to do a thing when someone signs up. PS - if setting up a workflow like that sounds super overwhelming, I've got something for you: my Dubsado Workflow! It shows you every step in my workflows and helps you set it up, too!

On the down side, sometimes Dubsado can feel a bit clunky compared to Honeybook. Occasionally it is slow to load and doesn't always look as nice as Honeybook. If Honeybook ever adds more options for automations, I may switch back. But, just a quick note about that!

To recap...

Basically, if you aren't super tech savvy and need something simple, go with Session. Honeybook is great for full sessions where you can automate most steps. If you want a lot of options for customizations and the best automation options, Dubsado will be best for you! No matter what, you can make any CRM work for you in any stage of business. A CRM is going to look much more professional than just Google docs or something like that. There's always cheaper options too, like Shootproof, when you're first starting - so just start somewhere small and grow from there!

Links Mentioned in the Episode:

+ Honeybook Discount Code

+ Session Discount Code

+ Dubsado Discount Code

+ Shootproof Free Trial

+ 12 Proven Mini-Session Themes

+ Dubsado Workflow

Topics Discussed:

Session (3:03)

Honeybook (5:24)

Dubsado (8:24)

Recap (12:44)

21. 4 Key Emails To Send Mini-Sessions Clients

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 21 Jun 2021 06:00:00 -0500

Welcome back to the Business Journey Podcast! If you haven't noticed yet, our episodes lately are really focusing on mini-sessions. And, there's a reason! We're almost to prime mini-session season and I want you to be well-prepared to host the most amazing and profitable sessions you've ever had. Today, we're talking about 4 key emails to send mini-session clients that will take your client experience to a whole new level. (PS. If you're still trying to decide what KIND of mini-session to host, I've got a free resource for you with 12 proven mini-session themes. Grab it here!)

I think that sometimes photographers believe mini-sessions are so short that your client experience gets stunted. I've heard people say they can't serve their clients well for only a mini-session! But, I beg to differ. In my opinion, you can still serve them well leading up to your mini-session. Your session is going to go by quickly. There's no denying that. So instead, really crate a valuable client experience on leading up to the actual photos. One easy way to do that is the emails you send to clients ahead of time. I personally use Dubsado to setup these emails and you can actually get my whole Dubsado workflow HERE! Here's FOUR emails to send mini-session clients that will uplevel your client experience.

Client Questionnaire

I send a simple questionnaire to every single min-session client. This questionnaire helps me get to know them better and know how I abetter serve them. I ask about their families, their photo history, and if there's special needs I should be aware of. My questionnaire truly ensures that we're going to make the most of their 15 minutes with me! When I'm in the middle of sessions, I can even glance at it quickly before the next family comes so I'm ready for them. If you want a copy of this questionnaire, you can get it HERE! It's a no brainer!

Client Experience Guide

Another automated email I send to my mini-session clients is my Client Experience guide. This is a PDF guide I created that includes tips about what to wear and what to expect before, during, and after their session as well as tips to help make sure their session is a success. The whole purpose of the guide is to answer questions they may have before they even ask them! Mine is designed specifically for families and I only ever hear positive things from my clients about it! If you want a copy of my Canva template, you can grab that HERE!

Final Info Email

I call this my "famous final info email" because I talk about it a TON with my students! This email is jam-packed with information for my clients and they get it right before their session. It's designed to literally answer any question I could get in the last day or so before their session - things like specific directions, the time of their slot, reminders about what to wear and more. I want to help my clients feel prepared, so I over communicate and make sure there's nothing left to chance. Worried about writing all of these emails for your clients? I've got you covered! Grab my email templates in the shop!

Request for Review

The last email I send is the one that's often forgotten by photographers: a request for a review. After you've delivered your gallery, one of the best things you can do for your business is to request a review. The whole world runs on social proof these days - so GET IT from your clients right away! Make it easy for your clients and link your Facebook page, Google reviews, or any other spot you might want them to write their review. And don't be afraid to ask specific questions like how they felt during the session, about the experience, and if they liked the photos.

It's SO easy to add these four emails into your workflow but it's honestly astounding how deeply it impacts your client's experience with you and your business. With my email templates, these emails are super easy to put together and you can uplevel your client experience literally overnight. I recommend getting these added into your workflow now, before busy season hits and you'll be ready for the best set of mini-sessions yet!

Links Mentioned in this Episode

+ FREE Mini-Session Class

+ 12 Mini-Session Ideas

+ Client Questionnaire

+ Client Experience Guide

+ Email Templates

+ 20% Off Dubsado

Topics Discussed in this Episode

Client Questionnaire (4:45)

Client Experience Guide (6:48)

Final Email (9:18)

Request for Review (13:04)

20. How To Book Mini-Sessions With No Client Base

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 14 Jun 2021 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

We've got another episode of the Business Journey Podcast to share with you today! Today, we're diving into another one of my all-time favorite topics: how to book mini-sessions with no client base. It's one of the biggest misconceptions when it comes to mini-sessions - that you have to have a huge client base for these sessions to be profitable. But, it's a lie! You can totally have successful mini-sessions, no matter the size of your client base. And today, we're going to walk through some super practical tips to help make sure you have profitable mini-sessions wherever you are in your business.

Build Your Portfolio

In order to reach and book new clients, you have to have a portfolio that you can use online. From a consumer's standpoint, they're going to want to book with someone they know is an expert. For us, that means we need to actually have photographs that are ours to show off on our websites and social media platforms. An easy way to build your portfolio? A model call! Post in your local community groups with a date and time you need a family for, offer some digitals in exchange for their time and now you've got a session you can use to advertise! I usually do a few families so I can make sure I'm diversifying my portfolio, too. The same goes for your actual mini-sessions with themes. You'll need photos to advertise them so have a model call so you can photograph your set!

Have a Home Base for Your Clients

When I say "home base", I really mean a centralized spot that clients and potential clients can go to be able to see your work and get in touch with you. Ideally, this should be your website. But if you're not quite to that stage, a strong Facebook or Instagram page would suffice. Now, I totally get how terrifying that sounds. We aren't web designers! We're photographers! The good news is that so many website platforms have templates - like Showit and Wix. So, you're not out there all alone trying to design a website. Remember to keep it simple to start. You need a home page, a portfolio page, and a contact page. That's literally all you need to start with - and done is better than perfect, so get that site up!

Advertise Where Your Ideal Clients Are

So many business owners get swept up in the idea that they have to do every single thing when it comes to marketing. But the truth is, you need to focus on where your ideal client actually is. Think about where your ideal clients hang out: Mom's groups on Facebook? Instagram? Pinterest? Once you know, put your energy in that direction and location. A big piece of advice for marketing is to exhaust all of your free options first. I'll be the first to say I love my Facebook ads now but when I started my business, I wouldn't have been able to understand them and get the most return for my money. So start small and where you know your ideal audience is - and you'll be amazed at how you can start making connections there!

Appear in High Demand

This step is vital for booking clients with little to no client base. I learned this one from my mentors and I think it was a HUGE turning point in my business. From a consumer's perspective, people want to work with someone who's in demand and good at what they do. So make sure you look like you're in demand! All this basically means is share constantly - no one has to know if it was a model call or free session of your sister's kids. Stretch out whatever you've got as long as you can! You can share the final images, behind the scenes - like editing or at the session, before and afters, while you're scouting the location... you get the idea.

Booking mini-sessions with little to no client base is way easier than it seems! With these four tips, you'll find your business is going from slow to booming in no time. Seriously, everything in business just comes down to a little bit of planning! And speaking of planning... Don't forget, I've got a FREE guide to help you decide what kind of mini-sessions to plan this fall. Trust me, you need to be planning NOW for those sessions to be a success! This freebie has twelve (yep, you read that right!) proven-to-work mini-session themes that you can use this year. You can download that guide HERE!

Links Mentioned in this Episode

+ 12 Mini-Session Ideas

+ Behind the Lens Membership

Topics Discussed in this Episode

Build Your Portfolio (5:15)

Home Base for Clients (8:00)

Advertise Where Your Clients Are (10:08)

Appear in High Demand (16:00)

19. Mini-Sessions Vs. Full Sessions (and Why Minis Win)

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 07 Jun 2021 06:00:00 -0500

Today, we're talking about mini-sessions vs. full sessions for photographers and why mini-sessions win out every time. We're going to dive into the numbers and talk about the nitty gritty details so that you truly understand why I believe in the value of mini-sessions for photographers. I can't wait to talk to you about this topic, it's truly one of my favorites because it surprises SO many people!

Now, before we get too far, I wanted to remind you, if you haven't checked out my free minis class, you're missing out! It's jam packed with all kinds of details about how I structure mini-sessions, market them to be profitable, and book out EVERY time. Trust me, after this blog post, you'll want to go take the class and get going for your own mini-sessions!

Mini-Sessions vs. Full Sessions

Honestly, I feel like this is a MAJOR showdown when it comes to photography businesses. All the time, I'm in groups online and trying to convince photographers to consider offering mini-sessions. If they only understood how much better these sessions can be for your time, energy, wallet, and life... they'd agree! That's why I wanted to talk about it today with you. To be clear, when I say "mini-session", I mean sessions that are 15 minutes and stacked in a time block. These are not stand alone sessions - they occur back to back at a location that the photographer has planned. There are a limited number of images given. Basically, a limited and controlled session. A full session, in comparison, is 30-60 minutes with a full gallery of at least 15+ images. Clients choose the location and it's not as controlled on your end.

Mini-Sessions maximize your time.

As a business owner, I'm always looking for ways to maximize my time, energy, and money. And when I do mini-sessions, I make more hourly than I do during a regular session. And that doesn't even include what you might make by upselling your galleries after the fact. If you're curious about how to upsell your mini-session gallery, make sure you tune into my free class. Oh, and I break down ALL of the math on the podcast episode, so tune in to hear all the numbers laid out for why you actually make more with minis hourly!!

Mini-sessions happen over one or two days!

The spring and fall are notoriously busy times of year for photographers. During these peak seasons, I put all of my energy into mini-sessions. Instead of saying how many dates can I book with full sessions, I'm asking how many slots I can fill on one or two days. I'm not giving up all of my time throughout some beautiful times of year to be photographing sessions. Instead, I can be with my family!

Some sessions SHOULD be full sessions.

I want to be clear: I'm not saying never do full sessions! There are definitely types of sessions that should be a full 30-60 minutes, like newborn or maternity sessions. But, if it can be a mini-session, try to make it one and maximize your time and calendar (and profit) in busy times of the year. During off season, we are booking full sessions because there's not the same demand for sessions - so we can go a little bit slower and not overdo our schedule without helping our wallet!

So...

I truly believe mini-sessions can be a great and easy way to increase the profitability of your business, if you know what you're doing! I hope that I've convinced you, but if you're worried about your mini-sessions tanking, I've got another FREE resource for you: my 12 Mini-Session Ideas. I've got 12 proven themes that people LOVE. Now is the time to start thinking about your fall minis, so make sure you're well-prepared!

Links Mentioned in this Episode

+ FREE Mini-Session Class

+ 12 Mini-Session Ideas

+ Behind the Lens Membership

Topics Discussed in this Episode

Mini-Sessions vs. Full Sessions (1:49)

Mini-Sessions + Time (4:20)

Mini-Sessions + Schedule (9:06)

Full Sessions (11:25)

18. My Insane Love For Shootproof

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 31 May 2021 06:00:00 -0500

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript

If you're a photographer, today's episode of the Business Journey Podcast is definitely worth a listen. I'm chatting all about my insane life for Shootproof, a gallery delivery system I literally cannot live without. It's one of the best delivery softwares that exist for photographers and I really think every photographer should be using it! Let's dive in because I want you to get started with it today!

Before we get too far, I want to mention a free resource I've got for you as we get into mini session season! It's full of TWELVE proven mini-session themes that people absolutely love. So grab that HERE. Trust me, they'll get you started on the right foot with your mini-sessions this year!

Why Shootproof

I've been using Shootproof from the very, very beginning of my business. Initially, when I started using it, the primary reason that I stuck with it was because it was a good price point. I needed an inexpensive option at the start of my business, and I'm sure many of you can relate to that. Shootproof also allowed for me to send contracts and invoices and at the time, the only other CRM options with similar documents were super expensive. Eventually I grew into those systems (like Honeybook and Dubsado) but at the start, I wanted something that still looked and felt professional for a smaller price! As I grew into other CRMs, I still kept Shootproof as my delivery system because there's just SO many functionalities I really, really love, which I'm going to dive in with you now!

Limiting Downloads

Shootproof has gallery presets so you can go in and set the parameters of a gallery you want to use over and over again, including how many downloads someone can get from their gallery. By limiting downloads to 5 (when I deliver 20-30 images), I can upsell my galleries which we've talked about before! But, Shootproof makes it SUPER easy for me to set up these downloads and I don't have to track them per client. It's already done in the system.

Automated Email Campaigns

One of my favorite features of Shootproof is their automated email campaigns. Whether you're doing a mini or full session, you can use this campaign feature to send reminders about downloading images, purchasing more, or whatever you want. It's a great and easy way to automate the upselling process for your sessions! You can set various triggers so that if they do or don't download images, they get certain emails. I don't know about you but I'm a little anxious about trying to sell directly to my clients but if the system is automatically doing it for me, then I can just relax and let Shootproof do it's job for me!

Contracts & Invoices

Like I mentioned at the beginning, Shootproof does have contracts and invoices built in. I think this is SO important - especially if you're at the early stages of your business. Instead of having to invest in a lot of softwares, you can invest in a smaller one that still allows you to look professional. You can easily lay out and track your projects, invoices, and contracts all within Shootpoof. You'll outgrow it eventually, but it's not a bad starting place!

Shootproof is a GREAT delivery system for photographers in any stage. And if you're reading and thinking about switching, I want to encourage you to DO IT! But, of course, think about the pros and cons for your own business. I love the automation features included in Shootproof and they've made a huge difference in my ability to upsell galleries, which I love. Honestly, I'm always open to talk about ANY questions you have about Shootproof. We talk about it a ton in my Rebecca Rice Education Facebook group.

If you want to join my Facebook group, join us in Behind the Lens! Not only do you get the behind the scenes videos of sessions each month, plus a masterclass of a special topic but you also get access to my community online. We've got photographers in all stages of their business there asking questions and talking with each other, but it's seriously just SO supportive. I absolutely love it. Check out Behind the Lens Membership and join us this spring!

Links Mentioned in this Episode

+ 12 Mini-Session Ideas

+Try Shootproof for FREE

+ Behind the Lens Membership

Topics Discussed in this Episode

Why Shootproof (2:20)

Limiting Downloads (5:15)

Automated Email Campaigns (8:42)

Contracts & Invoices (10:20)

17. Cultivating Friendships In The Photography Industry

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 24 May 2021 06:00:00 -0500

Another episode of the Business Journey Podcast is live! I'm so excited about today's topic - I know, I say that about them all, but seriously this is a really important one! As a photographer, so much of our job is being social and making connections both with clients and other photographers. If you're anything like me as an introvert, cultivating those friendships isn't always the easiest. So today, I want to share a few tips for cultivating friendships in the photography industry!

Find YOUR Tribe.

I know it sounds really simple, but focus on finding a community of people that are like-minded. Find people that you feel align with your your vision, who you are and who you want to be. When I was working as a youth minister, I used to say "show me your friends and I'll show you your future" but it really is true. Surround yourself with people who are like you and who you want to be in 5 years.

Be intentional.

Let's be honest: relationships with other photographers and vendors don't happen by accident. You have to truly think about what you're doing and carefully put yourself out there. As an introvert, I know how uncomfortable that feels but it's necessary. Whether it's a coffee meet up in your area or a Clubhouse room, find a way to make intentional connections.

Support each other.

We have a WHOLE episode on the idea of community over competition (see it here!), that's how strongly I believe in this tip. Remember that building connections and relationships is about truly connecting and cheering for others. This is not a race and you don't need to compare yourself to others. Celebrate where each of you are in the journey. You'd be surprised how naturally relationships form from there.

There you have it! Three easy and practical tips to help you with cultivating relationships in the photography industry. I hope that you start to connect with others around you and find your tribe! You deserve it! Life is so much better with people in your corner.

And don't forget, if you're thinking about your mini-sessions for the summer and fall, I've got a free resource for you! It's full of TWELVE proven mini-session themes that people absolutely love. So grab that HERE. Trust me, they'll get you started on the right foot with your mini-sessions this year!

Links Mentioned in this Episode

+ 12 Mini-Session Ideas

Topics We Discussed

Find your tribe (3:47)

Be intentional (6:38)

Support each other (11:53)

16. 5 Books That Transformed My Business

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 17 May 2021 06:00:00 -0500

Welcome back to the Business Journey podcast! I'm SO excited to be sharing today's episode with you because I truly believe in the power of reading. Honestly, I think every small business owner should make time to read because it's just such a powerful experience and way to consume content that can change your life. Today, I'm excited to be sharing FIVE books that have been transformational for my business with you. Remember, you don't have to actually read the book to consume the knowledge - try an audio book if you can't find time to sit and read. There's so many options to get the content - so let's dive right in!

Making Time to Read

Look, I get it. We're all SUPER busy people - running businesses, raising kids, and having a life. But I just want you to remember that if you read 20 minutes a day, you can finish at least one book a month. I used to believe that if I couldn't finish a chapter, it wasn't worth reading in that sitting. But now, I've learned that's not the case. Try to carve out a little time for YOU. Whether you read or listen to an audiobook, give yourself that time to relax and enjoy! Now, onto the books!

Profit First by Mike Michalowicz

"Profit First" was seriously transformational for my finances. This book helped me understand that the idea of having a profitable business was possible. This book teaches you how to allocate your expenses, profit, and what you actually pay yourself so that you can make money! Combined with the You Need a Budget (YNAB) app and website, this book seriously changed how I look at my money!

Traction by Gino Wickman

"Traction" is alllll about how you structure and run your business, a concept Wickman calls "EOS". The whole book walks you through how to structure your team - and even if you don't have a team, you can learn a lot about how to manage your business. Wickman helps you plan longterm for your business, looking ahead 3, 5, and 10 years in advance so you can figure out where you want your business to go. This book truly helped me understand the WHY of my business.

Rocket Fuel by Gino Wickman and Mark Winters

I wasn't lying when I said I loved Gino Wickman. Wickman partnered with Mark Winters to write this one. It's a bit of a spinoff from "Traction", but it really focuses on the relationship between a visionary/CEO and their team, especially an integrator. This relationship is super powerful and "Rocket Fuel" helped me understand how to lean into and use that to my advantage to grow. If you're even considering a team or are in the beginning stages of starting one, read this book!

The One Hour Content Plan by Meera Kothand

I have to admit that this book was a SUPER fast read but it was incredibly helpful. Kothand helps you map out a year of content, no matte what kind of business you're in. Because of this book, I had hundreds of ideas for content pieces. She honestly makes it so simple by asking questions that get you thinking about what your audience wants, and you'll wind up writing out a huge brain dump. Trust me! It's worth the read!

The Miracle Morning by Hal Elrod

Honestly, "The Miracle Morning" was great for my personal life more than anything but it did impact my business, too! This book really helps you outline a morning routine - one that's solid and focused. Whether you're a morning person or not, Elrod reminds you that giving yourself a sold routine will help you be the best version of you.

And there you have it: 5 books that have transformed my business! I hope that you go grab a copy and dive in. Truly, I believe the chance to read through some of these amazing ideas will help you in your own business. I know it sparked a LOT of thoughts and changes for me!

Links Mentioned in Episode

+ 12 Mini Session Ideas

+ Profit First

+ Traction

+Rocket Fuel

+ The One Hour Content Plan

+ The Miracle Morning

Topics We Discussed

Profit First (4:29)

Traction (7:17)

Rocket Fuel (10:19)

The One Hour Content Plan (11:55)

The Miracle Morning (14:30)

15. Tricks For Getting Kids To Cooperate For Family Photo Sessions

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 10 May 2021 06:00:00 -0500

I'm so excited we've got another Business Journey podcast episode for you today! As a family photographer in Nashville, TN this one resonates really well with me personally. I'm sharing tricks for getting kids to cooperate for family photos! Honestly, I LOVE photographing families with young toddlers. I think they're so much fun!! But I know for many family photographers, the idea of working with little ones can be super stressful. It can be difficult - so I totally get it. But, over the years, I've found some tricks work really well to get kids to cooperate, so I want to share them with you!

Before we jump in too far, I want to remind you of two things: my FREE class for Booked Out Minis and Behind the Lens membership! My free class is all about my marketing secrets. I'm seriously sharing the things I do to market for my business and for my mini-sessions. Whether you're new to the game or looking to up level your business, take a look! And don't forget about my Behind the Lens membership. This is a membership for family photographer where I take you behind the scenes on real sessions with me, as well as provide monthly masterclasses about specific topics. Now, let's dive into our topic today!

Start with the WHOLE family first!

I know this seems really basic, but it can make a huge difference in how the session starts out. By putting the family together first, I get a good feel for their family dynamic, which helps me guide the rest of the session. Not only does this help me, but help the kids as well. If they realize everyone - including mom and dad - are okay with me, they often realize it's okay if they relax and have fun with me too. Plus, putting everyone together at the start is just way less stressful for everyone overall! No one's being called out right away.

Follow their lead.

Not every kid is going to pose perfectly and stand there an entire session. I mean, with two kids of my own to think about, I'd be surprised if they did! Normally, they're in a new environment and someone they don't know is "in" their face with a camera. So let the kids lead. If they need time to run around, let them. Capture some action shots while they're doing that! By capturing some of these candids, I still allow the kids to relax and get more comfortable with me without wasting any time.

Get to know the kids.

Find out what they like! Are there songs you can sing for their attention? Is there a phrase that makes them laugh? Whatever it is, listen and ask - then run with it. Allow the parents to help here since they know best. You'll be surprised how many times I've gotten great laughs out of silly songs or repeating something someone said during the session. You can ask during the session about they stuff, but I also send a questionnaire to my families beforehand so I have an idea of what to expect for the kids - and so I can prepare!

Play games!

Let's be real, even with all of our best efforts, sometimes kids just need a little extra push. So don't be afraid to play games with them! For young kids, I'll jump around, play peekaboo, make super obnoxious noises... whatever it takes to get those little smiles. You can even tel the kids they can run for a little then they have to smile, or something similar! You'd be amazed at how quickly that brings out the laughs, too. That brings me to my last trick...

Bribery!

This might be my favorite trick of all to get kids to cooperate during family photo sessions. Encourage the parents to bring candy or snacks to bribe their kids. No, it's seriously IN my final email reminder because that's how much I think this works. I let the families decide what will work best for their kids (and so we don't have any issues with allergies or anything like that!), but it's amazing how much it helps. I am NOT below bribery when it comes to getting those smiles.

So there you have it! Those are my top 5 tips to get kids to cooperate during family photos! I know that these tricks might not change everything during a session, but generally they do work to get a few smiles in there. If you're looking to see how I use these tricks in real time, make sure you join me over in Behind the Lens! I can't wait to hear how your family portraits go!

Topics We Discussed:

Start with the whole family first! (2:59)

Follow their lead. (4:10)

Get to know the kids. (4:51)

Play games! (7:05)

Bribery!! (8:42)

Links mentioned in this Episode:

+ Behind the Lens Membership

+ FREE Minis Class

+ Client Questionnaire Template

+ Email Templates

14. My Shooting Indoors Horror Story

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 03 May 2021 06:00:00 -0500

If you haven't joined Behind the Lens with Rebecca Rice yet, you're missing out. I recently shared a lifestyle newborn session on the blog and I was immediately messaged by so many photographers about whether or not I used flash during the session. They couldn't believe I got the light I did naturally. And the truth was, I didn't! I DID use a flash. Awhile ago, during one of my indoor newborn sessions, I learned this lesson the hard way. So now, I never show up to an indoor session without my flash. And today, on the Business Journey Podcast, I'm sharing all about indoor photo session horror story that taught me this lesson and how you can learn from my mistakes.

My Indoor Photo Session Horror Story

When I was a new photographer, I took an indoor lifestyle session. It was a lot of fun - but I made a major mistake. I didn't use my flash. And, looking back, I wish I had! I knew I should have but I just wasn't comfortable with it yet. But I realized as I began to edit the images that I had definitely screwed up. Make sure you listen to all of the details on the podcast today!! Not only did this session teach me to always bring my flash, but it's inspired me to become a better teacher.

Now, I want to be sure other photographers don't make the mistakes I have in my business. That's one of the reasons I LOVE Behind the Lens. You, my students, are literally coming along with me on family sessions outdoors AND indoors. This month's session is actually behind the scenes from that recent lifestyle newborn session. And, our masterclass for the month of April? ALL about flash! I designed this program so that you can learn from me and go into every session with confidence. I know how it feels to realize the session wasn't what you wanted or hoped for. By showing you what things really look like in a family or newborn session, in real life lighting situations, and walking you through my decisions, I'm able to help you learn in a setting that's as close to being by my side as possible.

Join us today!

If you haven't joined us yet, sign up today! I promise, this is the BEST decision you'll make today! Not only do you get access to videos that are behind the scenes of my sessions, but you get a masterclass each month about a special topic to help you continue to grow your skills and business. And on top of that, you'll join our Facebook community page which is full of so many supportive and amazing photographers, just like you.

Oh, and PS! Don't forget, if you're planning minis this year, join my FREE class to learn more about how to get fully booked out mini sessions! Trust me, it is possible. And, I truly want you to succeed!

Links Mentioned in Episode:

+ Behind the Lens with Rebecca Rice

+ FREE Minis Class

13. What Community Over Competition Looks Like

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 26 Apr 2021 06:00:00 -0500

Our next episode of the Business Journey Podcast is live today and we’re talking about something that’s really personal to me: community over competition. This is one of those topics that needs to be talked about and really isn’t… and simultaneously, when talked about too much, can lose it’s meaning. There are so many people in our industry that preach “community over competition” but don’t demonstrate actions that back it up. I seriously believe in it and I truly want my groups, students, and followers to believe in it too! So, let’s talk about what it really means to believe in community over competition.

First off, I strive to create an environment that is supporting in as many ways as possible for my students. And one of the things I’m most proud of is my Facebook group for my students. With Behind the Lens open for enrollment, it’s the easiest way to be added to this group. I’m so proud to hear my students rave about the empowering community we’ve created, and I hope you can join us too!

Focus on having an abundant mindset.

The first part of this idea is having an abundance mindset. We don’t need to be jealous or upset about those around us who do well. Instead, we have to truly believe and know that there ARE enough clients for all of us! We don’t need to hide in our shells and guard our secrets, because there are plenty of people to serve. And I honestly believe that – and that everyone’s ideal client is out there. And NOT every client is the person you’re meant to serve. So why wouldn’t you want to send them to someone who is the perfect match?! And not only that, but just because someone else is succeeding doesn’t mean that you won’t. Read that again, seriously!

Elevate others.

Being part of a group that values community over competition means elevating others. Even if they are “your competition.” Remember what I just said about ideal clients? If you KNOW that you aren’t going to be the best person for a job, elevate or suggest someone else who would be. When I lived in Texas, I would always recommend another photographer if I couldn’t make the request work. In theory, she was my direct competition. And I may have lost some potential long-term clients to her but that’s okay! She seriously IS amazing and I had no problem sharing her name. And guess what? Something surprising happened – she began to do the same. If she couldn’t meet a request, she’d suggest me. THAT is the power of this community. Creating relationships that will elevate you and that you can elevate is a crucial part of community over competition. I TRULY wanted her to succeed!

Be mindful of how you interact.

Honestly, it seems silly to even mention this… but be kind. Building a community is about being kind and taking care of each other. Personally, I don’t understand how communities are built on bashing others – especially new photographers. We were all new at one point! Additionally, take the time to actually make connections and friends… not just a connection for personal gain. Just be mindful of your motives and make sure you’re taking care of the relationships and people around you.

When the idea of community over competition takes off in the right way, it can be SUCH an empowering and encouraging space for us business owners. I’m so grateful to everyone in my Facebook group who makes the Rebecca Rice Education group that way! We weren’t meant to face this road as entrepreneurs alone, so finding a good community is key to your success as a business owner, in my opinion. If we all do our best to create a welcoming environment, the world will change for the better.

Topics Discussed:

What Community over Competition Means (4:20)

Abundance Mindset (4:55)

Elevate Others (8:58)

Interactions (13:56)

Links Mentioned:

+ Behind the Lens Membership

12. 4 Reasons You Should Have an Email List

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 19 Apr 2021 06:00:00 -0500

It's Monday again! That means a new episode of the Business Journey Podcast has dropped and today we're talking about all the things related to an email list! I'm a HUGE believer that, as photographers, we should be utilizing our email lists to book more clients. Email lists are the perfect way to grow and build your audience, as well as continuing to serve your current audience. Today, I'm sharing four reasons you should have an email list as a photographer.

Before we jump into the why of an email list, I want to mention my favorite email software: Flodesk. In my opinion, it's the best one out there. It's beautiful, easy to use and kind of like the Canva of email systems! And, I even have a discount code for 50% off - for life! So definitely grab that and let's get started.

Reason #1: You OWN your email list.

You might have heard this before, but an email list is really the only list of clients and potential clients that you own. You don't own your social media followers - sorry to break it to you. If your Instagram or Facebook page disappeared tomorrow, your email list has ALL of the potential clients you've connected with - and that's yours. If you 100% rely on your social media accounts to book clients, you're putting all of your eggs into one basket - and that basket could easily break. Email is never going to disappear, let's be real. So having a way to communicate with clients, no matter what happens, is important.

Reason #2: Being in their inbox keeps you fresh in their minds.

I used to get frustrated with my email list. It seemed like I was sending things out, but people weren't always opening them. Someone finally reminded me that just because they don't always open it doesn't mean it's not doing something! By having your name show up regularly in their inbox, you're staying fresh in those people's minds. It reminds your potential clients that you're there when they're ready to book!

Reason #3: It's the easiest way to nurture your audience.

Email lists are really easy ways to create exclusive experiences for your client - maybe discounts, first booking access, things like that. I call my email list my VIP list because I WANT my clients to sign up and be ready to receive information for me. You can use your email list to send out monthly tips as well as remind them when it's time to book for your next mini session. I use my list to find models when I need model calls, send out recent blogs they might find helpful, and early booking access. But whatever it is, take the time to help them via email - show them that you care and that you're thinking of them. All of this goes into making your client experience even more elevated!

Reason #4: Email lists are the fastest way to book your warm clients.

Frankly, clients who sign up for your VIP list when they land on your website or book a session are READY to book you. So sending an email letting them know it's time to book will almost always result in sign ups. I know for me when I send out an email about new minis, within the hour, I've got 8-12 sign ups right away because people were waiting for it. They know me and trust me. They believe in my work and they're going to book a spot!

Honestly, I could come up with a million more reasons that email lists are amazing for photographers, but these four reasons you should have an email list sum up my feelings pretty well! I truly believe email lists are necessary for all photographers. I hope that you feel more confident about tackling your email list now, too! Seriously, the power of emails is incredible and I want every business owner to take advantage of them.

PS…. Don't forget the doors are open for Behind the Lens with Rebecca Rice so you can get the inside scoop on all things family sessions and how to grow your business thanks to some amazing masterclasses each month!

Topics We Discussed

Which Platform to Use (2:40)

#1: You OWN it! (4:16)

#2: Stay fresh in their minds (7:46)

#3: Nurture your audience (10:50)

#4: Warm Leads (17:25)

Links Mentioned in the Episode

+ Behind the Lens with Rebecca Rice

+ Get 50% off Flodesk!

11. Pinterest For Photographers

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 12 Apr 2021 06:00:00 -0500

We're diving right into another epsiode of the Business Journey podcast today and this one's all about Pinterest for photographers! Pinterest is one of those marketing platforms that photographers tend to put on the back burner because it doesn't seem like a super big deal. But I'm a firm believer that all photographers should be on Pinterest. If you aren't, you're missing out on some huge marketing opportunities! These tips will be super practical and help you start your journey on Pinterest. And if you're looking for more tips, make sure you join us in Behind the Lens with Rebecca Rice - we've got a masterclass on Pinterest for this month as your bonus content!!

Why Pinterest?

Pinterest is a search engine, not social media. It's not designed to connect us like other platforms. Instead, it's meant to be used for inspiration and to help drive traffic to your website. You won't probably book clients directly from Pinterest, and that's OKAY. Instead, use it to send people to your posts and website, which helps with your SEO! This helps tell Google your site is credible and worth sharing. It's a mindset shift, but an important one! Remember, the lifespan of a pin is much longer than a social media post - so it's worth starting a strategy.

What to Pin

When you first start out, figuring out what to pin can be difficult. But here's the thing: if you're blogging for your business (and you absolutely SHOULD be blogging!), you have content right there! Pin the images you include in the blog and share about the outfits. People will definitely search Pinterest for outfit ideas! Just make sure the images you share are linking back to your site - so that people go there to see the full post or tip you've pinned.

My Journey with Pinterest

When I first started, I was terrible about keeping up with Pinterest. But now, I've learned to automate things! If I set aside one time a month to really focus on scheduling my pins, it works out way better for me! Currently, I'm sitting at about 1.8 million monthly viewers. That's people that are seeing those pins in their feed. I don't get traffic like that ANY where else but Pinterest. While that's a vanity metric, I did check on my recent clicks and I'm still hitting over 600 a month. That's GREAT for a month!!! What's even cooler is that if someone searches in Google for images, a lot of the ones that come up that are mine actually are from Pinterest - meaning that's ONE more way people are seeing my content.

Seriously, if you're not using Pinterest as a photographer, you're missing out! It's SUCH an incredible resource. It's one more way people can find you and it's free. Pins have a long lifetime, are searchable on Google, and will drive traffic to your site - which helps your SEO. It's a no brainer!!

PS.... If you want to see my full process for automating Pinterest, be sure to join us in the Behind the Lens with Rebecca Rice masterclass!

Topics We Discussed

Why Pinterest Matters (3:00)

What to Pin (8:19)

My Journey with Pinterest (13:00)

Links Mentioned in the Episode

+ Behind the Lens with Rebecca Rice

+ Follow me on Pinterest

10. Quarterly Planning with Kat Schmoyer

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 05 Apr 2021 06:00:00 -0500

The first quarter of 2021 is almost over! We thought it was the perfect time to talk about quarterly planning and goal setting with Kat Schmoyer, a guest expert and business coach. On this episode of the Business Journey Podcast, we’re talking about how to create goals you’ll ACTUALLY achieve in your business each quarter. Whether you’re trying to reach a new revenue goal or have a new project to launch, Kat’s got some quarterly planning tips for you!

Create a plan you can stick to.

It’s tempting to want to do all the things. It’s our nature as entrepreneurs to wear all the hats and dream big. But when you start thinking about goal setting and achieving those goals in 90 days, you have to be realistic. Set goals and a plan you can actually stick with. Think long and hard about the time you have available and what you can do with that time. 90 days (a quarter) isn’t a long time. Be ambitious, but realistic so you can actually meet some goals! Setting yourself up for failure isn’t fun for anyone!

What to think about when setting goals.

When you set goals for your business, think about the WHY behind them. A new revenue goal is great but does it make sense? Are you realistically on target to do that new number? And if not, that’s okay. Set something more attainable. Also think about the time you have available to chase this goal. Is the goal you're setting really realistic in 90 days? Again, we don’t want to fail! And most importantly: make sure that this goal is actually useful for your business. For example, it’s GREAT to hit 10K followers on Instagram but if it’s not increasing your sales or your bookings, maybe another goal is a better use of your time.

Check in on your goals throughout the quarter.

Whatever kind of goal you set, make a plan to check in with yourself throughout the quarter. This will help you know what you need to give your attention to. We recommend creating a schedule of checkpoints every few weeks so you can monitor your progress and tweak your plan moving forward. This means that by the end of the 90 days, you’ll really understand what you did (or didn’t do) right to help move the needle forward in your business.

Creating quarterly goals is a GREAT way to create actual change in your business and these quarterly planning tips are a good way to start. With some hard work and focus, you can totally reach those big dreams! Try to remember to work in small, reasonable chunks – moving forward as much as you can every day. You’ve got this!

Kat's Quarterly Cure class

Kat's printable Quarterly Calendars

09. Instagram Reels for Photographers with Natasha Coyle & Stephanie Kase

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 29 Mar 2021 06:00:00 -0500

Our most recent episode of The Business Journey Podcast is a GREAT one. We have two very special guest experts chatting about all things Instagram Reels for Photographers. For this episode, we welcomed Natasha Coyle and Stephanie Kase to chat with me. They’re both incredible photographers and are taking the Instagram Reels world by storm!

Stephanie Kase is an Ohio wedding photographer and educator. She’s been in business for almost 7 years and has gone head first into education for photographers. You can find her on YouTube, where she focused a LOT on marketing through social media as well as Instagram.

Natasha Coyle is a Charleston wedding photographer and educator. She started her business when she was 34, a stay at home mom, and has created a thriving business! She’ll tell you that early on, she knew she had to connect with younger brides and grooms. So, she started working on short form video marketing and fell in love with it!

Impact of Instagram Reels

Both of our guest experts saw their following go from 4-5k to over 10K in the last few months. While that is a vanity metric and not truly indicative of how well a business is doing, it’s still important. It means their audience is growing. Short form video is a great way to create CONNECTIONS – that become people in your audience who you can sell to. But, these videos really show off your personality and connect with people on a personal level.

Sometimes the connections you make in videos are more powerful than anything you can write. People want to buy from people. Showing up in an authentic way for your audience through video is super powerful.

Instagram Reels Hacks

When you’re first learning, I won’t lie, it can be a little time consuming to start to make Reels. But, Stephanie and Natasha shared a few practical hacks to make Instagram Reels for photographers a bit easier. The first seems super obvious but just save inspiration when you’re on Instagram anyway. If you scroll by a Reel you like, save it and then use it as inspiration later – reuse the sound or do your own twist on the challenge. Another super easy tip is to batch create your content. Spend one afternoon filming a BUNCH of video that you can use for the Reels, then share them more strategically.

And here’s a quick reminder: everyone wants to be polished and put together when they film video but short form video is about being more free and who you are. Messy buns included.

A little encouragement…

Remember the purpose of Reels. Create them so that they’re helpful to you. Going viral is a flashy thing when it comes to social media… But, it won’t grow your brand – make sure you remember that first and foremost. The connection you build is the goal. But it’s something we’re all learning how to do! They’re meant to be joyful and to share your personality, so have a little fun with them.

Natasha and Stephanie shared LOTS of great tips on Instagram Reels for photographers, so make sure you listen to the full episode for them all!

Topics We Discussed

Introducing the Guests (2:13)

Impact of Instagram Reels (6:28)

Hacks for Instagram Reels (11:53)

A Little Encouragement (21:33)

Links Mentioned in this Episode

+ Meet Stephanie

+ Meet Natasha

+ First Access for Behind the Lens Membership

08. Fighting Comparison in the Photography Industry

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 22 Mar 2021 06:00:00 -0500

Today's podcast episode is something that's coming from the heart. I have so many friends and students who have reached out to me, saying they struggle with the comparison that comes along with the photography industry. It makes me SO sad. Because comparison kills so many things in our lives: joy, excitement, motivation, and so much more. I wanted to share three easy and practical ideas that help me with fighting comparison in the photography industry. I hope you find something helpful and bring back some of the joy in your life!

Change your mindset.

The first and possibly the biggest thing that helps fight comparison in the photography industry is a mindset shift. There's two big pieces here. First, try to focus on the fact that there are plenty of clients to go around. Every market is saturated. But every client is NOT your client. And that's a good thing! We all serve our clients differently and you want to attract the people that are a good fit for your business! And remember that every journey looks differently. Our businesses and our homes, lives, and clients look different. That's perfectly okay! That doesn't mean anyone is doing it "better" than you!

And, second: Remember that elevating someone else does NOT push you lower. It doesn't hurt you to cheer someone else on. And not everyone is competition. There are more than enough clients out there for all of us. These photographers around you aren't your competition. Our hearts are healthier and happier when we support those around us - not tear them down. So here's a challenge for you today: cheer someone on that's killing it!! Celebrate the good stuff.

Community over Competition matters.

There's SO many places for photographers to connect online: Facebook groups, Instagram, education support groups, the list goes on and on. Just remember that community over competition really matters. While a lot of these online forums are great and supportive, there's plenty that aren't. If you're in a place that turns more toxic or even just FEELS toxic, say goodbye! It's not healthy to constantly live in a situation where you just compare yourself to others. Give yourself the freedom to leave a situation that isn't good for you. And seriously, this attitude MATTERS. We should be lifting each other up - not constantly tearing each other down.

(Shameless plug here, but I'm SO grateful that none of my Rebecca Rice Education spaces are that way! Everyone is super supportive and seriously amazing! If you're looking for a community like that, join us by becoming a member of Behind the Lens!).

Remove yourself from the situation.

A super practical way to make the comparison game a bit easier is to simply remove yourself from the situation whenever possible. For so many of us, we spend time online for our business... but we also spend it scrolling and comparing (let's be honest, here!). If it's really starting to bother you, it's time to remove the app from your phone. Or if that's too drastic, try simply hiding the person that you're struggling over and comparing yourself to. You can also "mute" them temporarily on the app until you feel like you're in a better space. This is your permission to let them go and step back from their account.

I hope that these ideas give you some easy and practical ways to fight comparison as a photographer. I know that it's hard - and it's ugly, and worst of all, it's everywhere. But you ARE a great photographer - and you matter. There is truly room for all of us!

Behind the Lens with Rebecca Rice

If you didn't hear it last week, I'm launching a new membership in April: Behind the Lens with Rebecca Rice! This will be a low-cost monthly membership where you come with me on family photo sessions! Each month, you'll receive behind the scenes videos from sessions and also a masterclass about a specific topic with a guest expert (or me!). Behind the scenes videos will range from outdoor family photos, maternity sessions, newborns, and so much more. I want you to see how all these sessions actually go in real life! Make sure you're on our email list so you get first access!!

Topics We Discussed:

Behind the Lens Information (1:30)

Changing Mindset (4:45)

Leaving Toxic Environments (14:00)

Remove Yourself/Muting Accounts (16:03)

Links Mentioned in the Episode:

+ First Access for Behind the Lens Membership

07. Nailing a Light & Airy Style

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 15 Mar 2021 06:00:00 -0500

One question I’ve received a LOT as a photographer and photography educator is how I “nail” the light & airy style in my photographs. So, today I want to share a few of my favorite tips to achieve the light & airy style in your portraits too! This will be a little more technical than our past Business Journey posts, but if you’re hoping to achieve a new style in your portraits, this is definitely the blog for you!

Before we get into all of the nitty gritty details, I want to remind you that I DO have Light & Airy Preset for sale in my shop! Now, remember: a preset isn’t the end all, be all, but it can be helpful when you’re editing! Now, onto the practical tips…

Background Choice

Believe it or not, a light & airy style is achieved IN camera – not through editing. Well, editing does play a little bit of a role but most of it comes from HOW you shoot the image. Find a background that allows a lot of light in your lens. That means staying away from dark brick, bushes, and thick trees. Focus on locations that bring a lot of light into the image. If you like the greenery, that’s great – just try turning your clients some so it’s to their side. You’ll be surprised how quickly a slight shift like that can change the light in your frame.

And… hint, hint: if you’ve struggled with how to pose a family or where to pose them, make sure you stay tuned…. on April 1st, we’re launching something really exciting! A membership for family photographers to see how I work behind the scenes ON a session!!! Make sure you keep your eyes peeled for more information on Behind the Lens with Rebecca Rice!

White Balance & Metering

A true Light & Airy style has a white balance that’s true to color. So instead of intentionally warm or intentionally cool, my goal is to get skin tones as true as possible during a session. When I talk about metering, I’m talking about the little “ticker” you see when you’re showing. Between your ISO, shutter speed, and aperture, you’ll be able to achieve the look you’re going for. I use my EXPO Disc to help achieve the best possible white balance in camera and I expose my image for my subjects. You can read more about all of that here!

Preset for Editing

Although a preset will help you achieve the light & airy style, it shouldn’t be the only thing you rely on! That’s why I’m including it third on the list. I work hard to achieve the look I want in the camera and then when I go to edit, I use my base preset to get more consistency in my images. For me, the preset merely gives me a starting place to work my edits from. I apply my preset (one click!) and then just need to adjust the exposure, usually. And that’s about it!

Radial Filter

The last secret I have is another editing tip! In Lightroom, you have filters available to you! I choose the radial filter to make sure everything around my subject is exposed enough. This is helpful if my subjects are perfectly exposed by the background still feels a bit dark. I use the filter on everything that isn’t my subjects and then up the exposure. It’s super simple! I walk through this process in my Shooting & Editing Course too!

Achieving a Light & Airy style is WAY easier than you think, trust me! Focus on getting your background nice and airy and then work through some of the editing hacks. You’ll be amazed at how quickly your images become the style you’ve always envisioned. I can’t wait to see your new images! And remember, tune into the podcast while you’re reading along for all of the in depth tips!

Topics We Discussed:

Background Choice (3:50)

Behind the Lens with Rebecca Rice (7:50)

White Balance & Metering (10:43)

Preset (13:43)

Radio Filter (16:24)

Links Mentioned in the episode

+ Light & Airy Preset

+ Shooting & Editing Course

+ Signup for Access to Behind the Lens With Rebecca Rice

06. Family Posing Secrets

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 08 Mar 2021 06:00:00 -0500

One of the questions I'm asked as a Nashville family photographer is any tips for posing families. I'm SO excited to tell you that today’s episode is all about my top family posing secrets. I'm dishing out my top THREE tips for you. I always want my clients to feel natural and relaxed and I never want to be the one freezing in the middle of my session. I've been there. Over it! Over the years, I've learned that having a few tricks in my back pocket creates genuine moments to capture, and way fewer awkward pauses in my sessions. I work with a variety of ages in my sessions and it helps with ALL of them, so trust me when I say these family posing secrets will help you, no matter who you work with!

Have a Posing Workflow

When I say posing workflow, what I mean is a list of groupings or various poses that you’re going to hit from start to finish in your session. A workflow can help your session move smoothly and avoid any awkward moments for you or your clients. My posing workflow also includes MUST HAVE poses for every session - make sure you tune into the podcast to find out why that's so important!

Use Prompts

Prompts are key phrases I’ll say or questions I’ll ask that bring out genuine smiles and memories for my clients. My goal? Getting real giggles and laughs out of my families, because there's NOTHING better than genuine emotion during a portrait session! During the episode, I share a few of my favorite prompts you can start using in your family sessions to get more real interaction. It's seriously my favorite family posing secret! And remember, even with younger kids, your prompts can become games - or things for them to do. These prompts are super easy to modify based on who you're working with!

Keep a reference, if needed.

Whenever I bring on a new associate photographer who will be helping me capture family portrait sessions, I remind them (just like I'm reminding you) that it's okay to take notes and keep them with you. Have them in a note on your phone or a piece of paper. No one is going to be bothered if you check over your list so you don't forget things. The longer you do this, the easier it gets. I promise!

On the podcast, I have the chance to answer a few other questions - like how to work with younger kids or teenagers during my sessions, how I start family sessions, and how I manage to capture portraits of JUST the parents. Make sure you take a listen - there's time stamps below to help you find these questions. Family portrait sessions should be fun - and NOT stressful for you or your clients. Over time and with practice, you'll develop systems to help make sure your sessions are enjoyable! And, if you're still looking for more posing resources, check out my Family Posing Mini Course!

Topics We Discussed

Have a posing workflow (2:20)

Use prompts (6:00)

Keep a reference if needed (11:51)

Posing with toddlers (14:05)

Portraits of JUST the parents (15:40)

Posing with teens (17:23)

How I start a session (19:42)

My favorite family pose (21:37)

Links Mentioned in this Episode

+ Family Posing Mini Course

05. 4 Reasons Your Minis Aren't Booking

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 01 Mar 2021 06:00:00 -0500

Today we’re diving into more about mini-sessions and talking about the 4 reasons your mini-sessions haven't booked! Students always ask me why their mini sessions aren't booking! There's generally 4 main reasons that sessions don't book so let's dive into them! But before we do that, I want to let you know that the doors open for my Profitable Mini Sessions Course 2.0 TODAY! The doors have been shut for months and I can't wait to welcome everyone in again! Spots will close on Friday March 5th and won't open again until the fall, so make sure you grab a spot today.

Back to today's topic! I know that not booking your mini sessions can be frustrated, and it can make the whole idea of them awful. If you're not sure what you're doing wrong, this is a place to start. Take a deep breath - we're going to make this happen for you!

Reason #1: Timing is Bad

Whether it's the timing of the year or whatever's going on in the world, sometimes it's just not a good idea to have mini-sessions. For example, if it's 100 degrees in the summer in Texas, people aren't going to want to stand around outside, no matter how quick your session is. As we go into the spring, now's the perfect time for mini- sessions! If your sessions aren't booking, look at when you're trying to book them. Remember, the season does matter!

Reason #2: An Undesirable Theme

Mini-sessions are almost known for their themes in some photography studios! I know that my photography students work really hard on crafting themes, but we have to remember that people have to want to book the theme you create. Think about whether or not this is something people are going to like, want, or need. If you struggle with coming up with ideas for themed spring minis, I do have a free download with 12 Themes for Profitable Minis.

Reason #3: Not Marketing Well

If you're not marketing well, you're not going to book, period. You can have beautiful images, the best themes, the best setup... but if you're not marketing well, you're not going to book. Your marketing plan can't just consist of posting online and hoping it works. You need to get in front of a larger audience!

Reason #4: You Need a Head Start

Remember, for minis, you need to give yourself a head start. Don't just start posting the week before. Ideally, you should be sharing about your minis 4-6 weeks before they're on the calendar. In my Mini-Sessions Playbook, we talk all about why this is important! Basically, it is a step by step checklist that walks you through from like nine weeks out all the way and what you should be doing every single week. You need to get your name out there and that takes time.

Don't let these reasons your mini-sessions haven't booked discourage you! There's so many ways to make mini-sessions profitable - trust me on that. I seriously believe in the power of mini-sessions and I hope you will too!

Topics We Discussed

Intro into why your minis aren't booking (2:00)

Your timing is bad (2:35)

An undesirable theme (6:26)

Not marketing well (7:57)

You need a head start (10:41)

Links Mentioned in the episode:

+ Mini-Sessions Playbook

+ 60 Posing Prompts

+ 12 Themes for Profitable Minis

+Profitable Mini Sessions Course 2.0

04. Clubhouse Room: Mini-Sessions Q&A

Rebecca Rice — Wed, 24 Feb 2021 06:00:00 -0500

Earlier this week, I hosted a Clubhouse call all about... you guessed it, mini-sessions! My students call me the Mini-Session Queen, which I just adore. And I LOVE being able to drop some knowledge for other photographers who are thinking about diving into mini-sessions. This Clubhouse Mini-Sessions Q & A was a chance for my students and other photographers to ask anything they wanted about mini-sessions.

If you aren't familiar with Clubhouse, basically it's a new social platform that's like a giant zoom call with audio only. People hop into “rooms” and either engage in conversation or just listen to the conversation happening. Right now it's only available for iPhone users, and is by invitation only. Needless to say, it's not easy to get into a room! I knew I wanted to be able to share our conversation with everyone that ISN'T on Clubhouse, so we recorded this especially for YOU!!

Mini-Sessions Q & A

Make sure you listen to the Business Journey Podcast episode to hear all of the questions and answers... there were some really great ones! As you probably know, I 100% believe in the power of mini-sessions. I completely believe that you can build a profitable and sustainable business with them. Or, use them to supplement your income during slower seasons. Whatever your reason is to start planning mini-sessions, I hope this Q & A inspires you!

And if you're not sold yet on mini-sessions, make sure you check out my recent podcast episodes about Mini-Session Misconceptions. Trust me, this is a good one if you're hearing any of the lies in our industry about mini-sessions! I've also got some great tips to start planning for your spring mini-sessions, too!

Looking for more help?

Don't forget! I'm hosting a FREE class all about mini sessions on February 24th and 25th. You can sign up here and if you can’t attend live, that’s okay. Sign up anyway and get a replay!

Topics We Covered:

Free mini-sessions class coming up on 2/24 and 2/25 (3:23)

Should I market as Mommy & Me Minis or open it up to Spring Mini-Sessions? (4:52)

How should I price my full sessions so that my mini-sessions prices make sense? (8:24)

Does Cloudspot let you limit the number of downloads in the gallery? (11:12)

If you're on the fence about Rebecca's Profitable Mini-Sessions Course 2.0... (13:24)

What types of shots to you capture in a Mommy & Me Mini to get a full gallery of images? (14:06)

Do you get photos of just the kids during a Mommy & Me, too? (17:18)

When should I start advertising my mini-sessions? (17:50)

Do you market your minis on social media first, or to an email list? (19:50)

What should I do if my local Facebook Mom Groups don't allow advertising? (23:00)

Is it possible to start a photography business with mini-sessions? (27:40)

Where can I find affordable props? (28:15)

How do you remain consistent when minis aren't booking? (28:53)

Links Mentioned in the episode:

+Free Mini Session Class

+50% off Flodesk (email system)

+ Mini-Sessions Playbook

+ 60 Posing Prompts

03. Mini-Sessions Misconceptions

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 22 Feb 2021 07:00:00 -0500

Today, we were talking about mini-session misconceptions. There are so many lies that people believe about mini sessions and I want to take the time to talk about why they aren't true. Photographers will tell me that many sessions don't work and they'll tell me why. And I'm sitting there thinking, "Who told you that? Why are you believing these lies? Because it is not true." I believe wholeheartedly that mini sessions can be extremely profitable, especially when they're done right. When you follow a system in place and plan ahead, they're amazing!

Before we jump in, I want to let you know that I am hosting a FREE class all about mini sessions on February 24th and 25th. You can sign up here and if you can't attend live, that's okay. Sign up anyway and get a replay! Now, onto those mini-session misconceptions...

"I have to charge super low because it's a mini!"

This is the first misconception I hear a LOT. Remember, a mini session is less time but not lower quality! Mini sessions are a good way for clients to get a taste of what your full session and experience can be like. It's better to leave them wanting more - and wanting to book a full session. So, price accordingly and so you actually make a profit! Remember, mini doesn't mean cheap!!! It's just a mini experience.

"I don't have a big enough client base!"

The second misconception is that photographers often think they need a super large client base to book their mini sessions successfully. I'll be the first one to tell you that's not true! Marketing is the key to fully booking your mini session. If you market well, you CAN book your mini sessions. I promise you - as someone who booked her first set of mini sessions with zero client base, I'm living proof it's possible. I'm actually going to be sharing 3 marketing secrets from my own business in my free class coming up on February 24th and 25th, so make sure you grab a seat.

"I only get price shoppers!"

The next misconception I hear a lot is that photographers think they only get price shoppers when booking mini sessions. There's this huge idea that for that reason alone, mini sessions aren't worth it. If you feel like you're getting price shoppers, it's probably because you're setting the price too low and not marketing well. I'm telling you from my own experience, I've gotten some of the best clients from my mini sessions!

"Mini session setups are expensive!"

I don't know where people got the idea that they have to have a super cute, perfectly coordinated setup for every mini session they do. Some of my most popular sessions are fall sessions outdoors, among the leaves - or the blue bonnets in the spring! If you do want to get props, plan to get some that are timeless and can be used over and over again. This will help save you money down the line and keep your sessions profitable.

And if you want to get some tips about spring minis, make sure you check out last week's podcast!

I know that starting a new project, like mini sessions, can feel scary. But hopefully learning how these mini-session misconceptions are actually false is helpful to you! I want you to know that with structure, some good marketing, and planning, mini sessions CAN be profitable. I hope that you'll join me for the free Mini session Class this week!

Topics We Covered

Mini Session Class Details (2:00)

Charging Super Low: (2:56)

No Client Base: (6:08)

Price Shoppers: (7:45)

Expensive Setups: (10:00)

How to get Models: (15:54)

Links Mentioned in the episode:

+Free Mini Session Class

02. Prepping For Spring Mini-Sessions

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 15 Feb 2021 07:00:00 -0500

Another episode of The Business Journey Podcast is live! We are talking about one of my favorite topics of all time: mini sessions! Mini sessions are the bread and butter of my business - I'm truly the biggest fan of them. Today, I want to focus on prepping for spring mini sessions. Yes, spring mini sessions. In February. Because, if you're not planning for them already, you should be! When people begin coming out of hibernation and want to start asking around for photographers, you want to be the post and photographer they tag!

When it comes to planning your spring minis, I have THREE tips that I'm sharing on the podcast. Make sure you check it out for all of the details, but I've got the overview for you here! Spring minis are one of my favorite types of sessions all year long. Every year, I make about $15,000 JUST from spring minis alone. I hope that got your attention! Now... onto the tips to prepare for your spring minis:

Take your promo shots NOW (if you can).

When I say "promo shots", I mean the images you'll be using to advertise your minis. Make sure you show what your location, setup, and theme will be! These are the first photos everyone will see of your setup so they really matter. And if you don't have the chance to capture your setup before your minis because it's your first year (and probably location specific, like bluebell fields!), tune into the podcast to see what my recommendation is. It's easier than you think!

Pick a date and count back 6-8 weeks to advertise.

Counting back this many weeks gives you plenty of time to book up your minis. Most of the time mini sessions "fail" because the photographer didn't give enough time to book the sessions. You need time for the advertisements to work! If you're not naturally a planner, I know this can be more difficult - and that's okay! I have lots of tips to help you on the podcast - and in my Mini Session Playbook!

Open one date at a time.

The final tip is to only open one date at a time. If you're planning on multiple dates, it can be really ambitious unless you have a huge client base. I recommend that you start slowly and open the first day. When those start to fill up, you can open the others. You don't want your minis scattered in small bunches across multiple dates - it's better if they're back-to-back for your own planning! There's some other benefits, too, but you'll have to tune in to learn them all!

There they are! Three quick tips to help you with prepping for spring mini sessions! Make sure you listen to the whole episode and get all of the secrets I'm sharing about booking your minis! And check out our first podcast episode here!

Topics We Discussed

Why you should prepare your sessions NOW (1:15)

Theme Inspiration (3:00)

Take Your Promo Shots Now (3:48)

What if I don't have promo shots? The WRONG thing to do (6:48)

What if I don't have promo shots? The RIGHT thing to do (7:50)

Open Up One Date at a Time. (14:50)

Links mentioned in the episode:

+ 12 Theme Ideas Free Download

+ Mini Session Playbook

01. Balancing Work-Life and Mom-Life

Rebecca Rice — Mon, 08 Feb 2021 07:00:00 -0500

Let’s be honest, time management is hard! From the time I started my photography business to July 2020, my business was a side hustle. I had a full time job! I was balancing work-life, mom-life, AND my side business as a family photographer. I want to give you some tips and tricks I learned to help balance my time between the three of those things. I still use these now because they are so helpful!

When I was thinking about podcast topics, I knew this topic would be the perfect start!

I hope these tips are helpful to you and your business!

Here is a quick view at some of the things I talked about:

"If you're the kind of mom who feels guilty for working instead of being with your kids..." (2:40)

Set Office Hours (4:30)

Batching your work (5:25)

Do Not Disturb! (6:11)

"You have to be flexible." (8:02)

Automate anything you can! (11:21)

Outsourcing (14:40)

"Lets take editing for example..." (16:33)

Outsourcing Your Social Media (18:25)

LINKS MENTIONED:

+ 5 Must-Have Apps Freebie Download

+ Dubsado (20% off)

+ HoneyBook (50% off)

Mini Sessions Made Easy

113. Why Social Media Isn't Enough To Book Out Your Minis

112. The Power of Using an Email List To Book Out Mini-Sessions

111. Using Minis To Get Full Session Clients

110. Why Your Minis Aren't Booking

109. Spring Minis Theme Ideas

108. How To Price Your Full Sessions So Your Minis Pricing Makes Sense

107. How To Price Your Minis

Apple Podcasts |Spotify |Transcript

More Resources: Mini Session Theme Ideas | Prep Week

Here's What We'll Cover:

How to Price Your Mini Sessions for Profit

Gather Your Numbers

Calculating Your Numbers

Price Your Mini Sessions with Confidence

106. Planning Your 2025 Mini-Sessions

Apple Podcasts |Spotify |Transcript

Why Planning Your Mini Sessions Early is Valuable

Key Areas to Prep

What Happens If You Don't Plan

What We Covered:

105. Minis Made Easy

Apple Podcasts |Spotify |Transcript

Why Focus on Mini Sessions?

What Can You Expect from Minis Made Easy?

104. How To Set Boundaries With Difficult Clients

Apple Podcasts |Spotify |Transcript

More Resources: Portrait Contract Template | Free Business & Marketing Class

Stay Professional and Kind

Refer to Your Contract

Give a Yes with a Boundary

Avoid Burning Bridges

What We Covered:

103. Mini-Sessions Q&A

Apple Podcasts |Spotify |Transcript

More Resources: Live Webinar | Posing Workflow | Contract

What do you do with uncooperative kids?

How do you advertise your minis?

How do you get comfortable with short time slots?

More Questions?

What We Covered:

102. Tips For Doing A Christmas In July Mini-Sessions Promotion

Apple Podcasts |Spotify |Transcript

More Resources: $3k Mini Sessions Blueprint | Portrait Contract | Questionnaire | Email Templates | Client Experience Guide| Dubsado Discount

Get Started...NOW!

How Long Do You Advertise?

Hot Topic Question

Set Up Automations

What We Covered:

101. 5 Reasons You Should Do a 'Christmas in July' Mini Sessions Promotion

Apple Podcasts |Spotify |Transcript

More Resources: Free Minis Class

Greater Exposure

Get Ahead of Demand

Kickstarter

Influx of Revenue

Overall Estimate

What We Covered:

100. 1-0-0 Episodes: A Look Back At How It All Began

Apple Podcasts |Spotify |Transcript

More Resources: Free $3k Blueprint

Not a Glamorous Start

Short and Sweet

What Do You Want to Hear?

What We Covered:

99. A Day In The Life - What My Schedule Really Looks Like

More Resources: Free $3k Blueprint

Focused Work Hours

Intentional Use of Time

Next Steps

What We Covered:

98. Secrets To Successful Model Calls

More Resources: Free Class | Client Experience Guide | Portrait Contract Template

What's the Purpose?

Model Call Structure

Grow Your Email List

Model Call Must

What We Covered:

97. What Does Freedom Look Like For You?

Apple Podcasts | Spotify | Transcript